mt01419 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 606

SIEMENS

Sheet metal design


mt01419-s-1050
Proprietary and restricted rights notice

This software and related documentation are proprietary to Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software Inc.
© 2016 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc.

2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contents

Proprietary and restricted rights notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Course overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Introduction to Solid Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


Activity: Design a sheet metal part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Activity: Design a sheet metal part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Create the first sheet metal feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Construct flange features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Create additional flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Insert two holes on the side flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Create a flat pattern of the part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Sheet metal overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Material Table command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Gage Properties tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Activity: Starting sheet metal design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Set the material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Create a tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Create flanges from the tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Synchronous sketching overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Sketch workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Activity: Draw a simple sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Activity: Draw a simple sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Open a part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Choose a sketch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Draw the sketch shape with line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Add a circle to the sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Place sketch relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Place sketch dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Sketch complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sketch plane locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3


Contents
Contents

Drawing synchronous sketches of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20


Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Open sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Synchronous sketch behavior in the ordered environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Drawing ordered sketches of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Drawing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Drawing 2D elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Sketch geometric relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Geometric Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Distance and area measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Dimensioning sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Locked dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Dimension orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Dimension style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Creating profiles with text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Text Profile command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Place text as a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
PMI text size and color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Text command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Place a text box or text string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Sketches in PathFinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Sketches context menu in PathFinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Used Sketches context menu in PathFinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Sketch plane origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Reposition origin command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Zero Origin command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Reposition origin workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Sketch view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Sketch consumption and dimension migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Working with combinable sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Moving sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Manipulating sketch elements in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Moving and copying sketch elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Copy, cut, and paste sketch elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
Projecting elements onto a sketch plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
Project to sketch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Activity: Sketching (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Activity: Sketching (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Open a part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Start the sketching process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
Draw sketch geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Regions formed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
Place geometric relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
Add dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Turn off sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
Activity: Sketching (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
Activity: Sketching (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140

4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contents

Open a part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141


Create a sketch plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
Start the sketching process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
Observe sketch associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
Draw sketch geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
Edit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151
Activity: Sketching (Part 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151
Activity: Sketching (Part 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151
Open a part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
Turn on the display of an existing sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
Copy the sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
Paste the sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
Rotate the copied sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
Move the copied sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
Sketch projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
Drawing A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
Drawing B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
Drawing C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
Drawing D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
Drawing E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
Course review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
Course summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169

Base Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Base Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Construct the base feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tab command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Construct a tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Cut command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Activity: Using regions to create tabs and cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Use the sketch to create the base feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Create the flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Creating a cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Creating a wrapped cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Moving thickness faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Contour Flange command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Examples: Defining Reference Plane Orientation to Construct a Contour Flange . . . . . . . . 5-4
Activity: Constructing a base feature using contour flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Create a base feature using the Contour Flange command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5


Contents
Contents

Create a contour flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


Contour flange options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Create a partial contour flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Flanges, corners and bend relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Creating flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


Flange command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Corner Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Bend command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Insert a bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Close 2-Bend Corner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Activity: Flange and corner conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Flange creation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Partial flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Bend relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Inserting a bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Editing a bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Moving faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Hem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Hem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Hem command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Construct a hem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Activity: Using the hem command in sheet metal design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Create a hem on a single edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Create a hem on multiple adjacent edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2


Using the Design Intent panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Thickness chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Using the Thickness Chain Design Intent option in sheet metal modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Copying, pasting, and attaching sheet metal features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Activity: Using Design Intent relationships in sheet metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Symmetry about the base reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contents

Creating persistent rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19


Thickness Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


Jog command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Editing the bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Activity: Using the jog and break corner command in sheet metal design ... . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Draw the sketch and create the base feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Create a jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Modifying the bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Using the Cut command to trim unwanted edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Using the Cut command to trim unwanted edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Deformation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Deformation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


Adding sheet metal deformation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Working with feature origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Activity: Working with deformation features in sheet metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Place a louver on the front face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Feature Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Patterning the deformation feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Placing Beads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Placing dimples and drawn cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Editing deformation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Placing a single gusset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Rotating faces containing gussets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Placing a gusset pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Activity: Adding deformation features across bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Unbend the sheet metal part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Display the sketches to create the bead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Create a bead across the bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Create another bead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Rebend the sheet metal part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Hide the sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7


Contents
Contents

Modeling synchronous and ordered features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Modeling synchronous and ordered features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2


Moving ordered features to synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Activity: Creating ordered features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Create a new part document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Create an ordered base feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Create an ordered cut feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Transition to the Synchronous environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Transition to the Ordered environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Activity: Creating both ordered and synchronous features in a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Create a new part document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Create a synchronous base feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Create an ordered feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Edit a synchronous feature face while in the ordered environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Transition to synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Edit the ordered feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Convert the ordered feature to a synchronous feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Move the converted feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

Emboss features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Emboss features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


Emboss command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Emboss a body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Dynamically edit an emboss feature in the synchronous environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Dynamically edit the clearance or thickness value in the ordered environment . . . . . . . . 12-16
Edit an emboss feature in the ordered environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Edit the thickness value of an emboss feature in the synchronous environment . . . . . . . 12-20
Activity: Create an emboss feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Open the activity file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Start the Emboss command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Select the target body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Select the tool body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Observe the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30

Creating flat patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Flattening sheet metal parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2


Creating flat pattern drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Construct a flat pattern in the sheet metal part document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Flat Pattern command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Save As Flat command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Activity: Creating a flat pattern from a sheet metal part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contents

Open a sheet metal file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18


Creating a flat pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Flat pattern options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Saving the flat pattern as a .dxf or .par file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Placing a flat pattern on a drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28

Converting sheet metal files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Converting part documents to sheet metal . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2


Part to Sheet Metal command . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Thin Part to Sheet Metal command . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Thin Part to Synchronous Sheet Metal command ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Activity: Convert a part to sheet metal . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Open the activity file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Start the Part to Sheet Metal command . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Select the linear edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Change the bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Chage the corner treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Create a dimple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21

Creating blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Creating blank features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2


Blank Body command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Blank Surface command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Activity: Create a blank body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Lesson review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Lesson summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11

Ordered sheet metal activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Activity: Editing an ordered flange feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2


Open activity file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Create a contour flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Create a flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Edit the flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Mirror the flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
An alternate method of creation for the contour flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Create a contour flange using the modified sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Use the Match Face option in the Flange command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Repeat the previous steps to complete the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Activity: Using the ordered lofted flange command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Open the activity file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Construct a lofted flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
Edit the loft profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9


Contents
Contents

Divide the bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29


Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
Activity: Constructing ordered sheet metal features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Open activity file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
Create a jog feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Create gusset features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
Create a circular-shaped gusset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Change gusset options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-43
Create a dimple feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
Create a drawn cutout feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-47
Create a louver feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
Create a pattern of the louver feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-51
Create a bead feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-53
Save and close the file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-55
Activity summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-56

10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Course overview

The Sheet Metal Design course was developed to demonstrate how to utilize the sheet metal feature
and design functions within Solid Edge to create sheet metal parts which maintain the design intent
even when changes are made to the material thickness or bend radius.

Course objectives
There are two objectives for this course. The first objective is to learn the fundamental tools required
to get started and understand the use of Solid Edge. The second objective is to learn the tools and
process of creating and editing sheet metal parts.
If you have already taken the Solid Edge Fundamentals Course or have mastered the use of the Solid
Edge fundamental tools, then you can go directly to the Sheet Metal specific lessons.
After successfully completing the fundamentals portion of this course, the student should be able to:
• Understand the Solid Edge user interface.

• Understand how to use reference planes.

• Create profiles and sketches.

After successfully completing sheet metal portion of this course, the student should be able to:
• Create sheet metal parts using both modeling and sheet metal features.

• Effectively create and edit sheet metal features.

• Create sheet metal deformation features.

• Convert a solid model to a sheet metal model.

• Create flat patterns.

• Create sheet metal drawings.

Why do I need sheet metal features?


You may be wondering why specific sheet metal features were created independent from
modeling features. Sheet metal features are unique from modeling features in that they contain
application-specific data such as bend allowance formula and other material property information.
Sheet metal features also have the ability to change their geometric representation with respect
to the formed state model.
Because of these characteristics, it is essential to the creation of a valid, usable sheet metal part that
you know when and how to use sheet metal features during the construction of your part. Incorrect
implementation or non-usage of sheet metal features may result in inaccurate or unproducible flat
pattern definitions.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11


Lesson 1: Introduction to Solid Edge

Solid Edge overview

Solid Edge is an industry-leading mechanical design system with exceptional tools for creating and
managing 3D digital prototypes. With superior core modeling and process workflows, a unique
focus on the needs of specific industries, and fully integrated design management, Solid Edge
guides projects toward an error free, accurate design solution. Solid Edge modeling and assembly
tools enable your engineering team to easily develop a full range of products, from single parts to
assemblies containing thousands of components. Tailored commands and structured workflows
accelerate the design of features common in specific industries and you ensure accurate fit and
function of parts by designing, analyzing and modifying them within the assembly model. With Solid
Edge, your products come together right first time, every time.

Solid Edge environments

To make the commands you need more accessible, Solid Edge has separate environments for
creating parts, constructing assemblies, and producing drawings. Each environment is self-contained.
For example, all the commands you need to create a sheet metal part are in the Sheet Metal
environment. The environments are tightly integrated, making it easy to move among them to
complete your designs.

Activity: Design a sheet metal part

Activity: Design a sheet metal part


Before covering any sheet metal topics, let's observe the simplicity of designing a sheet metal part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-1


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

Open a sheet metal file


▸ From the Start menu, click All Programs → Solid Edge ST9→ Solid Edge ST9.

▸ Click the Application menu→Open→Browse.


Open EZ design.psm located in the sheet metal training files folder.

1-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Introduction to Solid Edge

Create the first sheet metal feature


The first feature will be a tab that will be used as a base for building the sheet metal part.
▸ On the Home tab→Draw group, click the Rectangle by 2 Points command.

▸ Move the cursor over the plane shown and then click the lock. This locks the sketch plane.

▸ On the View tab→Views group, choose the Sketch View command .

▸ Draw the rectangle approximately as shown.

▸ Press Ctrl +I to return to an isometric view.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-3


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

▸ Turn off the display of the Base reference Planes.

▸ Click on the region formed by the rectangle and then click on the extrude handle.

1-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Introduction to Solid Edge

▸ Click in an open area of the window to accept the material direction and material thickness. If you
click the handle, the material direction changes.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-5


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

Construct flange features


▸ Select edge (1) and a flange handle appears.

▸ Click the flange handle axis shown to start the flange creation command.

1-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Introduction to Solid Edge

▸ Move the cursor to the approximate location shown and then click.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-7


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

▸ Create another flange as shown.

1-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Introduction to Solid Edge

Create additional flanges


▸ Select edge (1) and create the flange shown.

▸ Rotate the view and create a similar flange as shown.

▸ Press Ctrl+I to return to an isometric view.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-9


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

Insert two holes on the side flanges


▸ On the Home tab→Draw group, select the Circle command.

▸ Draw two circles on the face shown.

1-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Introduction to Solid Edge

▸ Select the two regions formed by the circles. Use QuickPick to make sure the first circular region
is selected. Press the spacebar key to add the second circular region to the select set.

▸ The system detects that you want to remove material from the sheet metal flange. The Cut
command bar appears.

Click the extrude handle axis and then select the Through All option on the command bar.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-11


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

▸ Click when the direction arrow is as shown.

1-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Introduction to Solid Edge

Create a flat pattern of the part


The sheet metal part is complete. Create a flat pattern of the part.
▸ On the Tools tab→Model group, select Flatten.

▸ Select the face shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 1-13


Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Solid
to Solid EdgeEdge

▸ Select the edge shown.

▸ Select Finish.

▸ Save the file. Design is complete.

1-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Lesson 2: Sheet metal overview

Sheet metal overview

Sheet metal design is governed by the premise that the raw material used to form a sheet metal part
is of common stock and of uniform thickness. The sheet metal part is designed in the formed state,
but in the manufacturing process, many of the features of the part will be applied to the part before
bending. The final locations of these features on the formed part is dependant on how the material
behaves during the bending process. Material may stretch as the elastic limit is exceeded during
bending and, while this stretching may be negligible in the final positioning of the feature, it may also
make the target position after bending be incorrectly located.
The stretching of material during bending varies based on the material used and the thickness of
the material. To correctly accommodate the stretching of material, calculations are made using a
standard bend formula, which is provided. This bend formula can be customized for each stock
material and by doing so, better accuracy is achieved in the resulting parts.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-1


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Terminology
Sheet metal features

1. Plate: Consists of a layer face and a thickness face.


2. Tab-Flange: Two plates connected by a bend.
3. Bend: Connects two tab-flanges.
4. Bend Relief: Option to prevent tearing during bending.
5. Cutouts: Openings in the part.
6. Corner: Where 2 or 3 bends meet.
7. Procedural Feature: Deformation features such as dimples, drawn cutouts, louvers, beads,
gussets, and so forth.

2-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Steering wheel behavior in sheet metal

When you select a thickness face, Solid Edge displays a steering wheel unique to the sheet metal
application. You can create flanges by selecting the flange start handle. You can use the primary
axis, parallel to the layer face, to manipulate the size of the plate.

(1) Primary Axis: Used to move or rotate the thickness face.


(2) Origin
(3) Flange start handle: This opens flange creation options on the command bar.

When you move the steering wheel origin, all of the steering wheel capabilities become accessible.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-3


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Material Table command

The Material Table command displays the Material Table dialog box. You can use the Material
Table dialog box to define the material and mechanical properties for a part.

For example, you can:


• Apply a material to a part in the current document.

• On the Material Properties tab, use the Add Custom Property button to add user-defined
physical, chemical, mechanical, electrical, and thermal properties to the list of standard properties
for a selected material. For more information, see the help topic, Create a custom material
property.

• In a sheet metal document, use the options on the Gage Properties tab to define the properties
for the sheet metal stock you are using, such as material thickness and bend radius. In Solid
Edge, you can store sheet metal gage information in the material library or in a Microsoft Excel
file. For more information, see Sheet metal gages file.

• Create, edit, and delete material property sets, which are stored in the material library property
file, “libraryName”.mtl. For more information, see Material library properties file.

• Change the units that are used to display material properties. You can use the Units button

to open the Units page (Solid Edge Options dialog box). For more information, see Set
the units of measure.

• Go to the folder location of the material table properties files by selecting the Material Folder

Location button . You also can Change the location of the material folder.

• When a material does not match what is in the Material Library the material highlights, and the
out of date indicator is displayed. The update option will update the options such that the
properties match what is in the library.

2-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Gage Properties tab


Use Excel file:
Specifies that you want to get the gage information from an Excel file.
Use the Solid Edge Options→File Locations→Sheet Metal Gage File path option to specify the
Excel file you want to use.
Use Gage Table:
Specifies the name of the gage table. You can use the Edit button to open the Excel file for edit.
Associate with material
Associates the gage table with the material specified in the field. The button is enabled when
the Use Excel File option is selected, a gage table is selected in the Use Gage Table, and a
material is selected in the Material tab.
When you select this option and click the Save button the gage table is associated with the
material in the material library. Once associated in the material library, when the same material is
applied to another file, the associated gage table is automatically used.
Sheet metal gage:
Displays the name of the current gage. When you select a name from the list, a set of associated
material and mechanical properties is displayed. You can use the tabs on the dialog box to
review or modify the properties. You can also define the material thickness using the Material
Thickness option on the Gage tab.
Material Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the part.
Bend radius:
Specifies the bend radius value for the part.
To facilitate creation of flat patterns, Solid Edge always creates a minimum bend radius for
features that can be flattened, even if you specify a bend radius value of zero (0.00). For metric
documents, a zero bend radius will actually be set to a value of approximately 0.002 millimeters.
For English documents, a zero bend radius will actually be set to a value of approximately
0.0000788 inches. If you need the bend radius to be exactly zero, you will have to create the
features in the Part environment.
If you would like to delete the minimum bend radius and minimum bend-relief surfaces that Solid
Edge creates, you can use the Delete Relief Faces command.
Relief depth:
Specifies the relief depth value for the part.
Relief width:
Specifies the relief width value for the part.
Bend Equation
Defines the bend equation formula you want to use. The bend equation formula is used to
calculate the flat pattern of a sheet metal part when using the Part Copy command. You can use
the standard formula delivered with Solid Edge, one of the example formulas in the Solid Edge
ST9/Custom/sheetmetal folder or a custom formula you develop.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-5


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Standard Formula
Specifies that the formula delivered with Solid Edge is used to calculate the flat pattern size.
The standard formula is:
PZL = * (BR + (NF * THK)) * BA / 180
Where:
PZL = Plastic Zone Length
BR = Bend Radius
NF = Neutral Factor
THK = Material Thickness
BA = Bend Angle
Neutral Factor:
Specifies the neutral factor to use for the bend(s).
Neutral Factor Specifies the default neutral factor for the bend(s).
Use Neutral Factors Specifies the neutral factor information is extracted from the Excel file.
from Excel File
Custom Formula
Specifies that a custom formula you define is used to calculate the flat pattern size.
ProgramID.ClassName:
Defines the custom bend formula you want to use. Type the program ID and class name
using the following syntax:
ProgramID.ClassName

Add Gage
Adds the new material or gage to the material library. This button is available when you have
defined a new material or gage.
Delete Gage
Deletes the existing material or gage in the material library. This button is available when you
have selected an existing material or gage.
Save
Updates the existing material or gage in the material library. This button is available when you
have changed the properties for an existing material or gage.

2-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Activity: Starting sheet metal design


Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to begin working in sheet metal. The activity explores some of the
settings used to create the part with the desired material and material properties. In this activity you
will accomplish the following:
• Create a new sheet metal part.

• Create the material to be used for the part.

• Modify the thickness of the material.

• Examine the bend formula and change the neutral factor.

• Create a base geometry consisting of a tab and then create flanges around the tab.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-7


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Click Application button → New → ISO Metric Sheet Metal.

2-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Set the material properties

Step 1: To set the file properties, click Application button → Info → Material Table.

Step 2: Click the Gage Properties tab.


Notice the default value of the neutral factor.

Note
This value will not be changed for this exercise. This step is to show where the
neutral factor can be modified if the need exists.

Step 3: Set Sheet metal gage to 8 gage.

Step 4: Click Apply to Model.

Note
Changes to material properties are applied to the current open document. If you
need to customize these values and use the new values across your enterprise,
then the values can be edited in the material library property file material.mtl,
and that file put in a location accessible to all that need it.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-9


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Create a tab
Step 1: Sketch a 50 mm square in the X-Y plane.

Step 2: Select the region shown.

Step 3: Create a tab by selecting the downward pointing vertical handle. Click again to accept.

2-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Note
Notice the material thickness corresponds to the gage set in the previous step.

The tab is created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-11


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Create flanges from the tab


▸ Select the two thickness faces shown.

▸ Select the flange start handle

▸ Set the Material Side option to Material Inside.

▸ Enter a distance of 50 mm for the new flanges.

2-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Note
Two flanges were created from the thickness faces on the tab. Notice the new entries
in PathFinder.

▸ Close the sheet metal document without saving. This completes the activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-13


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Activity summary
In this activity you set the material thickness using the gage tab on the material table. A tab was
placed and flanges were created from the thickness faces of the tab.

2-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sheet metal overview

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. Assign a term from the list below to each number.

Corner

Bend Relief

Cutouts

Procedural Feature

Tab-Flange

Bend

Plate

2. Name three methods of setting material thickness in a sheet metal document.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 2-15


Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: SheetSheet
metalmetal overview
overview

Lesson summary
In this lesson you set the material thickness using the gage tab on the material table. A tab was
placed and flanges were created from the thickness faces of the tab.

2-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Lesson 3: Sketching

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-1


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Synchronous sketching overview

2D sketch geometry describes the cross-sectional shape used to create a base solid body or the
shape used to create a feature on an existing solid body. You draw sketches on either a planar face
or a reference plane. You lock onto a planar face or reference plane to draw sketch geometry.
You can use both open and closed sketches to create a model feature. A sketch that forms a closed
area (from sketch elements or a combination of sketch elements and model edges on the sketch
plane) produces a selectable region. When you select a region, the protrusion feature command
starts. To use an open sketch, choose a protrusion command (Extrude or Revolve) in the Solids
group which requires a step to define the material side of the open sketch.
Sketches do not drive features. Geometric relationships applied to the sketch geometry do not
migrate to the feature created. The system can detect, on the resulting feature, tangent, parallel,
coplanar and concentric faces. Dimensional relationships do migrate from the sketch geometry to
the edges of the body as a feature is created.
Sketch geometry used in creating a feature is placed in a “Used Sketches” collector in PathFinder.
Any remaining sketch geometry not consumed remains in the “Sketches” collector.
By default, all sketch geometry placed on a sketch plane merge into a single sketch. This is controlled
by the sketch option “Merge with Coplanar Sketches”. If separate sketches are required on a sketch
plane, the “Merge with Coplanar Sketches” option can be turned off.

3-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketch workflow
1. On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose a sketching command.

2. Start drawing or lock to a sketch plane (reference plane or planar face) to draw sketch geometry
on.

3. (Optional) Draw a sketch in the active view orientation or rotate the view normal to the sketch

plane by choosing the View tab→Views group→Sketch View command . You can
also type Ctrl+H.

4. Draw sketch geometry or perform any sketch related operation (for example: placing
relationships, dimensions).

5. Finish or draw another sketch. If the sketch plane is locked and you need another sketch plane,
unlock the plane. Repeat steps 2–4.
If the new sketch area is on the same plane, continue drawing sketch geometry.

Note
You can only have one sketch on a plane, but the sketch may contain as many regions and
separate elements as you need. If separate sketches are required on a sketch plane, turn
off the Merge with Coplanar Sketches option.

Activity: Draw a simple sketch

Activity: Draw a simple sketch


This activity guides you through the process of drawing a simple sketch. You will add relationships
and dimensions.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-3


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

3-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Open a part file


▸ Start Solid Edge.

▸ On the Application menu, click→New→ISO Metric Part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-5


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Choose a sketch command

▸ On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose the Line command .

▸ Position the cursor as shown to place first point of line.

3-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Draw the sketch shape with line segments


▸ The line command requires two points to create a line. Click to place the first point of a line.

Note
For this activity, the images do not show the edit control handles (1) attached to the
sketch elements.

Notice the alignment lines connected to the cursor. These lines assist you in aligning sketch geometry.

When a line alignment is horizontal, you see the horizontal indicator.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-7


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

When a line alignment is vertical, you see the vertical indicator.

When you are at the endpoint of another line you see the endpoint indicator.

▸ Draw eight lines to form the basic shape shown. Be sure to make all of the lines horizontal or
vertical, but do not worry about the line lengths at this time.

3-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ In PathFinder, click the Base check box (1) to turn off the display of coordinate systems.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-9


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Add a circle to the sketch

▸ On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose the Circle by Center Point command .

▸ Place a circle as shown.

3-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Place sketch relationships

▸ On the Sketching tab→Relate group, choose the Horizontal/Vertical command .

▸ Align midpoint (2) with midpoint (1). Make sure you get the midpoint indicator before clicking.

▸ Align circle center (3) with midpoint (1). Make sure you get the center point indicator before
clicking.

▸ Align circle center (3) with midpoint (4). Make sure you get the center point indicator before
clicking.

▸ Align point (5) with point (6).

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-11


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Place sketch dimensions

Numbers denote the select location for dimensioning the sketch elements.

▸ On the Sketching tab→Dimension group, choose the Smart Dimension command .

▸ Dimension the circle by clicking at (3).


In the dimension value edit box, type 25.

▸ Dimension the length of line (4) by clicking at (4).


In the dimension value edit box, type 50.

▸ Dimension the length of line (1) by clicking at (1).


In the dimension value edit box, type 70.

▸ On the Sketching tab→Dimension group, choose the Distance Between command .

▸ Dimension the distance between line (1) and line (2) by clicking line (1) and then line (2).
In the dimension value edit box, type 90.

▸ Right-click to restart the dimension command.

▸ Dimension the distance between line (5) and line (6) by clicking line (5) and then line (6).
In the dimension value edit box, type 15.

3-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketch complete
The sketch is complete. Turn on the relationships handle display to see the sketch relationships.
▸ On the Sketching tab→Relate group, choose the Relationship Handles command.

This turns off the display of relationship handles.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-13


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Summary
In this activity you learned how to create a sketch. Dimensional and geometric relationships can be
added at any time during the sketch creation. Extruded or revolved features in Solid Edge require
sketches for creation.

3-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Practice
▸ Try changing dimensions and adding sketch geometry for practice. Otherwise, close the file
and do not save.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-15


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Sketch plane locking


Many commands in Solid Edge use a 2D plane for placement of geometry in 3D model space. For
example, when drawing 2D sketch elements, such as lines, arcs, and circles, the 2D elements reside
on a coordinate system plane, reference plane, or planar face on the model. This 2D plane is called
the sketch plane. Only one sketch plane is available at a time.
There are two methods for locking input to the sketch plane:
• Automatic locking, where the active command locks the sketch plane for you, and unlocks the
sketch plane when you restart the command, or you start another command.

• Manual locking, where you lock the sketch plane, and unlock it later yourself.

Sketch plane locking makes it easy to draw on several reference planes or planar faces quickly.

Automatic sketch plane locking

When you start a command that uses a sketch plane, and then position the cursor over a reference
plane or planar face, the plane or face highlights (1), and an edge on the plane (2) is highlighted to
indicate x-axis of the current sketch plane. The alignment lines, which extend outward from the
cursor, also align themselves to the plane under the cursor. A lock symbol (3) also displays if you
want to manually lock the sketch plane, which is discussed later.

3-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

When you click to position the starting point for the sketch element, the sketch plane is automatically
locked to the highlighted plane or face. The alignment lines (1) (2) remain displayed as you draw to
indicate the current sketch plane's X and Y axes.

The sketch plane remains locked until you right-click to restart the current command, or start another
command. This ensures all sketch input lies on the current sketch plane.
Sketch plane locking makes it easy to draw on several faces of the model quickly. For example, after
drawing the first circle, you can right-click to restart the command, then draw a circle on a second
face, right click again, and draw a circle on a third face.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-17


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Manual sketch plane locking


You can also manually lock the sketch plane. This is useful when the sketch geometry is complex or
will extend beyond the outer edges of the planar face or reference plane on which you want to draw.
When you are in a command that supports manual sketch plane locking, a lock symbol displays
near the cursor (1) when you are over a planar face or reference plane. You can click this symbol
to manually lock the plane.

Tip
You can also lock and unlock the sketch plane by pressing the F3 key when you are in any
command that supports sketch plane locking.

Note
A locked plane is denoted by brown colored edges. These colored edges only display
when a sketch command is active.

The sketch plane remains locked regardless of the cursor position until you manually unlock the
plane. This makes it easy to draw beyond the outer edges of the planar face.

3-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

When the sketch plane has been locked manually, a locked plane indicator symbol (1) displays
in the top-right corner of the graphics window.

When you want to unlock the sketch plane, you can click the locked plane indicator symbol in the
graphics window to unlock the plane, or you can press the F3 key.

Plane locking and PathFinder

Whether you lock the sketch plane automatically or manually, a locked plane indicator (1) appears in
PathFinder adjacent to the sketch which is locked.

If there are existing sketches in the model, you can lock and unlock the sketch plane using the Lock
Sketch Plane command on the PathFinder shortcut menu when your cursor is over a sketch entry.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-19


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Drawing synchronous sketches of parts


You draw synchronous sketches to establish the basic shape requirements of a part before you
construct any features. You can draw a synchronous sketch on a principal plane of the base
coordinate system, a planar face on the model, or a reference plane. You can then use these
sketches to create sketch-based features, such as extruded features which add or remove material.

Visual sketching aids

There are a variety of visual sketching aids available to you. The triad in the center of the graphics
window is the base coordinate system.

3-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

The principal planes on the base coordinate system are typically used to draw the first sketch for the
base feature on a new part.

You can also independently display the sketching grid, alignment lines, and coordinate readouts using
the Grid Options command.

Visual sketching aids

There are a variety of visual sketching aids available to you. The triad in the center of the graphics
window is the base coordinate system.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-21


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

The principal planes on the base coordinate system are typically used to draw the first sketch for the
base feature on a new part.

You can also independently display the sketching grid, alignment lines, and coordinate readouts using
the Grid Options command.

3-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Getting started with sketching


Getting started with sketching is easy. When you sketch elements, they will go on the coordinate
system plane, planar face, or reference plane that is directly under your cursor when you start
placing the element.
When starting a new part, you would typically draw a sketch on one of the three principal planes of
the base coordinate system. For example, you can draw the first sketch for a new part on the XZ
principal plane of the base coordinate system (1).

You can see which plane of the coordinate system you will draw on because the plane under the
cursor highlights, and the alignment lines, which extend out from the cursor, adjust dynamically
depending on what plane your cursor is over.

When you click to define the first endpoint of an element, such as a line, sketch input is locked
to the current plane.

Note
• If there is not a coordinate system plane, model face, or reference plane under your
cursor, the element will fall on one of the three principal planes of the document. The
system will automatically choose the one that is flattest to the view.

• See the Help topic, Start a sketch, to learn how to get started.

Sketch plane locking


Many of the sketching commands require a locked sketch plane for placement of 2D geometry in
3D model space.
There are two methods for locking the sketch plane:

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-23


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

• Automatic locking, where the active command locks the sketch plane for you, and unlocks the
sketch plane when you start another command. This makes it easy to get started.

• Manual locking, where you lock the sketch plane, and unlock it later yourself. This is useful for
complex sketches or for sketches where the sketch geometry extends beyond the boundary
of the sketch plane.

Note
To learn more, see: Sketch plane locking.

Synchronous sketches locked to faces

A synchronous sketch drawn on a model face is automatically locked to the face. As the face moves,
the sketch moves with the face. By default, the Maintain Sketch Planes option on the Advanced
Design Intent panel is on. See Using the Advanced Design Intent panel for more information.

To unlock the sketch from the model face, turn off the Maintain Sketch Planes option in the
Advanced Design Intent panel.
If a sketch is drawn on a model face that is coplanar to a base reference plane, the sketch is not
locked to the model face.

Sketch plane X-axis orientation

When you highlight a coordinate system plane, planar face, or reference plane on which you want to
draw a sketch, a default X-axis orientation is displayed automatically (1).

3-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

While you are defining the sketch plane and the default X-axis is highlighted (1), you can use the
shortcut keys to change the X-axis orientation. For example, you can press the N key to select the
next linear edge (2), or the B key to select the previous linear edge (3).

The valid shortcut keys for defining the X-axis orientation of a sketch plane are displayed in
PromptBar when you are defining the sketch plane.
The X-axis orientation (1) (2) of a sketch controls the dimension text alignment for dimensions, and
determines the horizontal and vertical axes for horizontal and vertical relationships.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-25


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Sketch regions

In a part or sheet metal document, when you draw 2D sketch elements that form a closed area, the
closed area is automatically displayed as a sketch region (1). When working in a shaded view, the
closed region also displays as shaded.

In a part or sheet metal document, you can use sketch regions to construct features using the Select
tool. Sketch regions are formed automatically when a series of sketch elements close on themselves
(1), or when sketch elements and one or more model edges form a closed area (2).

As you draw, you may want to disable sketch regions. You can do this by clearing the Enable Regions
command, which is located on the shortcut menu when you select a sketch in PathFinder.
You can use the Enable Regions command to turn region selection on again.
The Enable Regions command is not available in an assembly document.

3-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Adding dimensions and geometric relationships

You can add dimensions and geometric relationships to control the size, shape, and position of the
sketch elements. You can also place dimensions and geometric relationships relative to the primary
axes of the coordinate system. This can be especially useful for symmetric parts during later design
modifications. For example, the 10 mm and 22.5 mm dimensions were placed relative to the X and Z
axes of the base coordinate system.

Note
You can display and hide geometric relationships using the Relationship Handles
command.

You can also define functional relationships using the Variables command.

Keeping dimensions horizontal and vertical to the sketch geometry

To keep dimensions horizontal and vertical to the sketch geometry, you can move the sketch plane
origin and reorient the sketch plane X-axis using the Reposition Origin command on the Sketching
tab. This makes it possible to draw and dimension on different coplanar faces in the same sketch, yet
keep dimension text and relationships oriented to an edge on the face, as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-27


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Using sketches to construct features

When you use a sketch to construct a feature in a part or sheet metal document, by default, the
sketch elements are automatically consumed and transferred to the Used Sketches collection in
PathFinder and the dimensions on the sketch are automatically migrated to the appropriate model
edges when possible.

Note
After you construct a feature in a synchronous model, the original sketch geometry does
not drive the feature.

You can use the Migrate Geometry and Dimensions command on the shortcut menu when a sketch
is selected in PathFinder to control whether sketch elements are consumed and dimensions are
migrated when you construct features using the sketch.

Editing sketches

You can move and resize sketch elements using the Select tool. You also can edit sketch elements
using commands such as Extend To Next, Trim, Mirror, Scale, Rotate, Stretch, and so forth. With
these commands, you select the command first, then follow the prompts to edit the sketch elements
you want.

3-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketching and PathFinder


The sketches you draw are listed in PathFinder. PathFinder also lists the base coordinate system,
PMI dimensions, the base reference planes, features you construct, and used sketches.

You can display or hide individual sketches or all the sketches in the document using the check box
options in PathFinder and commands on the PathFinder shortcut menu.
When a sketch name is selected in PathFinder, you can use shortcut commands to:
• Delete a sketch.

• Cut, copy, and paste a sketches.

• Rename a sketch.

Moving sketches
Sometimes you may want to move or rotate an entire sketch to a new position in space. By default,
when you use the Select tool to select sketch elements in the graphics window, only a sketch region
or the selected sketch element is selectable.
To select an entire sketch, you can select the sketch entry in PathFinder, or you can use QuickPick
to select the sketch in the graphics window.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-29


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

You can then use the steering wheel to move or rotate the sketch to a new position in space.

Note
To make the move shown, turn off the Coplanar setting on the Design Intent panel or the
Advanced Design Intent. If not, the face and sketch move together because they are
coplanar.

If the sketch moves such that it becomes coplanar to another sketch, the two sketches combine into
one sketch, unless the Merge Coplanar sketches option is cleared for one of the sketches.

Sketches and associativity

Sketch geometry is not directly associative to the plane or face on which it is drawn. If you move the
plane or face on which the sketch is drawn, the sketch geometry does not move unless it is also in
the select set. This does not apply to sketches drawn on the principal planes of the base coordinate
system or the base reference planes, as these planes are fixed in space.
You can apply 2D geometric relationships between sketch elements and model edges. If the model
edges move, the sketch elements and geometric relationships update.

Restoring sketches

To restore a sketch to its original location on the model, use the Restore command on the shortcut
menu when a used sketch is selected. This can be useful if you want to use the sketch to construct
another feature elsewhere on the model or if you deleted the feature that the used sketch described.

3-30 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Projecting elements onto a sketch

You can use the Project to Sketch command on the Sketching page to project model edges or sketch
elements onto the current sketch plane. The sketch elements you project are associative to the
parent element. If the parent element is modified, the projected element updates.

Note
The associative link between the parent element and the projected element is discarded
when you construct a feature using the projected elements.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-31


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Regions

Definition

A region is a closed area formed by sketch elements or a combination of sketch elements and part
edges. Use regions to create a solid feature consisting of planar and non-planar faces.
Regions are formed by the placement of 2D sketch geometry on sketch planes or part faces. Regions
are created when a series of sketch elements or model edges form a closed area. Regions are a
by-product of a closed sketch. Deselected regions appear with a shaded light blue color.

Region examples

Selecting a region

As the cursor moves over a region, the region appears with a shaded tan color.

3-32 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

When the region is selected, the region appears with a shaded green color.

Regions can be selected in both object-action and action-object workflows.

Activity: Create regions

Activity: Create regions

This activity guides you through the process of drawing a sketch to observe when regions are formed.
You will also learn how to select regions.

Open a part file

▸ Start Solid Edge.

▸ On the Application menu, click→New→ISO Metric Part.

Draw a rectangle

▸ On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose the Line command .

▸ Draw a rectangle. Notice that as soon as the last line connects to the first line, a region forms.
(1) denotes the first point.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-33


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Select the region

▸ On the Home tab→Select group, choose the Select tool command .

3-34 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Move cursor over rectangle and notice the color change. Closed sketches (regions) and faces
highlight as the cursor moves over them.

▸ Select the region and notice the color change. The region can be used to create an extrusion or
a revolved extrusion. This is covered in the Base Feature Creation course. Press the Escape
key to end the Select command.

Create nested regions

▸ On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose the Rectangle command .

▸ Draw another rectangle that overlaps the first rectangle as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-35


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Select multiple regions

The two overlapping rectangles forms three regions.


▸ Move the cursor over the overlapping rectangles and notice the regions formed.

▸ Select each region and notice that the previously selected region is deselected.

▸ To select multiple regions, select a region and then press the Spacebar.

Note

The Spacebar sets the select mode to add/remove . If you select an element that
is already selected, it is deselected. If you select an element not already selected,
it is selected.

3-36 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Create the following select sets. Press Escape after each select set is created.

Summary

In this activity you learned how to create and select regions. Creating a synchronous feature in
Solid Edge requires a region.

Practice

▸ Try creating other regions for practice. Otherwise, close the file and do not save.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-37


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Open sketches

An open sketch that is not coplanar with a body face or is coplanar with a body face but does not
touch or cross a face edge does not create a region. A region is created if an open sketch is
connected to or crosses a coplanar face edge.

Note
Open sketches use the extrude command to create a body feature. Define the side of the
open sketch to add material to and the sketch automatically extends to next face to create a
body feature.

3-38 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Synchronous sketch behavior in the ordered environment

You can use synchronous sketches to create both synchronous and ordered features. Ordered
sketches cannot be used to create a synchronous feature because while in the synchronous
environment, ordered elements are not available for selection.

You can only select synchronous sketches when creating an ordered feature by using the Select
from Sketch option in the Profile step.

In ordered modeling, fully-constrained sketches help you maintain predictability as you change a
model by adding features and editing constraints. In synchronous modeling, sketches are consumed
by the features that are based upon them, after which time the sketches no longer drive the shape or
behavior of the model. So developing fully-constrained sketches is important in ordered modeling, but
not in synchronous modeling. In synchronous modeling it is important that a sketch properly define
a shape at the time the sketch is used to create new features; whether or not that shape is fully
constrained does not determine the appropriateness of the shape. Since constraints defined on a
sketch are consumed when the shape is used, they no longer constrain the resulting features.

Editing an ordered feature created with a synchronous sketch

Ordered features are driven by sketches. To edit the cross section definition of an ordered feature,
edit the driving sketch.

The following are the methods available for editing a synchronous sketch which drives an ordered
feature.
Directly edit the synchronous sketch

Step 1: Turn on the display of the driving synchronous sketch.

Step 2: Select a sketch element to edit.

You can move the selected sketch element and/or change the element properties on
command bar.

Step 3: Edit sketch dimensions.

Note
You cannot edit or add synchronous sketch relationships using this method.

Note
As you edit the synchronous sketch, the ordered feature dynamically updates.

Feature edit (Edit Profile)

Step 1: Select the ordered feature to edit.

Step 2: Choose the Edit Profile command on the Feature Edit box.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-39


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Step 3: The modeling environment switches to synchronous. You can now fully edit the
synchronous sketch.

Step 4: When the synchronous sketch edits are complete, switch to the ordered environment to
observe the feature edits.
Feature edit (Dynamic Edit)

Step 1: Select the ordered feature to edit.

Step 2: Choose the Dynamic Edit command on the Feature Edit box.

Step 3: The driving synchronous sketch appears. Make edits to synchronous sketch.

Synchronous sketch behavior in ordered modeling

• Synchronous sketch dimensions do not migrate to ordered features.

• Synchronous sketches do not move to the Used Sketches collector when used to create
an ordered feature.

• Synchronous sketches can drive ordered features.

• Synchronous sketches appear while in the ordered environment.

• Regions are disabled.

• Synchronous sketches appear in the synchronous sketch style and colors.

• When using the Select Tool in the ordered environment, synchronous sketch elements locate as
individual elements.

• You can move synchronous sketches using the steering wheel handle. The entire sketch moves
(not single elements).

• In the ordered environment, synchronous sketch geometry or relationships commands are not
available.

• You cannot copy synchronous and ordered sketches while in the ordered environment.

3-40 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing ordered sketches of parts


Drawing ordered sketches allows you to establish the basic functional requirements of a part before
you construct any features. You can draw a sketch on any reference plane using the Sketch
command in the Part and Sheet Metal environments. Then you can use these sketches to create
profile-based features.

Sketching a part before modeling it gives you several advantages:


• Allows you to draw multiple profiles on one reference plane.

• Allows you to define relationships, such as tangency or equality, between profiles on different
reference planes.

• Allows you to draw the profiles you want without creating the subsequent features until later.

Drawing ordered sketches


When you choose the Sketch command and then select a reference plane or planar face, a profile
view is displayed. You can then use the drawing commands to draw 2D geometry.
The sketch elements you draw are assigned to the active layer. For example, when working with
a complex sketch that will be used to construct a lofted feature, you may want to arrange the
elements on multiple layers.

Note
For more information about 2D drawing in Solid Edge, see the following related topics:
Drawing in Solid Edge and Drawing Profiles.

You can add dimensions and relationships to control the positions and sizes of the profiles. You can
also define functional relationships using the Variables command. You can use the Save and Save
All commands to save the sketch while you create them. When you have finished drawing, close the
profile view using the Close Sketch command on the command menu or click the Close Sketch
button in the window.
For more information on drawing sketches, see the Drawing 2D elements Help topic.

Sketches and PathFinder


Sketches are represented in the PathFinder tab just like features are. You can display or hide them
from the feature tree with the PathFinder Display: Sketches command on the shortcut menu. You can
use PathFinder to reorder or rename a sketch just as you would any feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-41


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Displaying sketches

You can control the display of all the sketches in a document or individual sketches. To display or
hide all sketches, use the Show All: Sketches and Hide All: Sketches commands. To display or
hide individual sketches, select a sketch in the application window or PathFinder, then use the Show
and Hide commands on the short cut menu.
You can also control the display of elements in a sketch by assigning the sketch elements to a logical
set of layers, and then display or hide the layers to control the display of the sketch elements.
When a sketch is active, it is displayed using the Profile color. When a sketch is not active, it is
displayed using the construction color. You can set the colors you want using the Options command.

Using sketches to construct features

You can use sketches to construct features in the following ways:


• Directly, by clicking the Select From Sketch button on the feature command bar.

• Indirectly, by clicking the Draw button on the feature command bar and then associatively copying
sketch geometry onto the active profile plane using the Include command.

Using sketches directly

You can use sketch profiles directly if no modifications to the profile are required. When constructing
an ordered feature, click the Select From Sketch button on the feature command bar. You can
then select one or more sketch profiles. When you click the Accept button on the command bar,
the profiles you selected are checked to make sure they are valid for the type of feature you are
constructing. For example, if you are constructing an ordered base feature, the profile you select
must be closed. If you select an open profile or more than one profile, an error message is displayed.
You can then select the Deselect (x) button on the command bar to clear the selected profiles.
Ordered features constructed using sketched profiles are associative to the sketch and update
when you edit the sketch.

Using sketches indirectly

If the sketch profile requires modification before using it to construct a feature, you must first copy it to
the active profile plane using the Include command. When you click the Draw Profile button on the
feature command bar, and define the profile plane you want, a profile view is displayed. You can then
use the Include command to copy elements from sketch profiles to the active profile plane.

3-42 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

After you have copied sketch elements, you can use the drawing commands to modify them. For
example, you may need to add elements to the profile not contained in the sketch. You can also add
dimensions and relationships between the elements on the active profile plane and the sketch.

The sketched elements you copy are associative to the sketch and will update if the sketch
dimensions are edited.

Editing and modifying sketches


You can modify sketch elements using the command bar or the element's handles. When you modify
an element, other elements may also change.

Selecting Elements
You can use the Select Tool to select elements in several ways:
• To select an individual element, position the cursor over the element and click when the
element highlights.

• To select multiple elements, press the Ctrl or the Shift key while you select the elements.

• To select all 2D elements, press Ctrl+A. The Select Tool command does not need to be
active for this to work.

• To deselect an element, press the Shift or Ctrl key and click the element.

• To select multiple elements using a fence, drag the cursor to define a rectangular fence. You
can use the Selection Options button on the Select Tool command bar to specify the
selection criteria you want.

Command bars
After you select an element, you can modify it by changing its values on a command bar. For
example, you can change the length of a line by typing a new value in the Length box on the
command bar.
Element handles
You can use an element's handles to modify an element. An element handle is represented by a
solid square on the element, such as the end of a line or the center of an arc. You can dynamically
drag a handle to modify an element. First, select the element, then drag the handle to modify it.
• Lines - Drag a handle to modify the length or angle of a line.

• Arcs - Drag an endpoint, midpoint, or center point handle to modify an arc.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-43


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

• Fillets and Chamfers - Drag the handle to modify the size of a fillet or chamfer.

Sketches and revolved features

Sketches that are used for constructing revolved ordered features must have an axis defined in the
sketch. If you select a sketch profile that does not have an axis, an error message is displayed. You
will have to cancel the revolved feature you are constructing, then open the sketch to define the axis.

Sketches and the swept and loft commands

Drawing sketches can be especially useful when constructing swept and lofted features. Because
the Sketch command allows you to define relationships between profiles on separate planes, you
can more easily define the relationships you need to control these features properly. Additionally,
the ability to exit a sketch profile window without creating a feature can be especially useful when
drawing the profiles for swept and lofted features.

Converting 2D drawing view data to a 3D model sketch

You can use the Create 3D command to convert two-dimensional drawing view data into a sketch
in a 3D model.
The command displays the Create 3D dialog box that prompts you for the drawing view elements you
want to include in the sketch.
Before selecting the elements that you want to include in the sketches, you need to select a template
to create a part, assembly, or sheet metal file. After you select a template file, specify the projection
angle that you want to use when the sketches are created in the new document. After you specify the
projection angle, select the view type of the elements you want to include in the sketch:
• Folded principal views are orthogonal or aligned with the primary view. You can select this
view type to define the primary view.

• Folded auxiliary views are true auxiliary views that are generally derived from principal views and
require a fold line to determine the edge or axis around which you want to fold the view.

• Copy views are not orthogonal and they may not actually align with the primary view. These
views are placed as sketches on the same plane as the last principal view defined in the draft file.

3-44 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

After you define this information, you are ready to select the geometry to create the sketches.
You can include lines, arcs, circles, curves, and polylines and line strings created with imported
data. You can drag the mouse to fence elements or press the Shift key and click each element
to select more than one element.

If you select the Fold Principal Views option or Fold Auxiliary Views option and it is not the
primary view, you can click the Fold Line button after you select all of the elements for the view.
The Fold Line button allows you to define a line or point in an orthogonal or auxiliary view
on which to fold the primary view.
If you want to define another view, click the New View button and select the next view.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-45


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Continue this process to define any additional views.

After you define all views, click the Finish button to launch the Part or Sheet Metal environment
to create the model file in which the views are placed as sketches.

3-46 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing commands
The commands for creating and manipulating sketch elements are located on the Sketching
tab→Draw group.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-47


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Drawing 2D elements
In Solid Edge, you can draw 2D elements to help you complete a variety of tasks. For example,
you can use 2D elements to construct features in the Part environment and to draw layouts in the
Assembly environment.
In the Draft environment, you can use 2D drawing tools to complete a variety of tasks such as
drawing sketches from scratch on the 2D Model sheet or in 2D views, creating background sheet
graphics, and defining cutting planes for section views. The drawing commands, relationships, and
dimensions work similarly in all environments.

Drawing commands and tools

You can draw any type of 2D geometric element in Solid Edge, such as lines, arcs, circles, B-spline
curves, rectangles, and polygons.

You can also use Solid Edge to do the following:


• Move, rotate, scale, and mirror elements

• Trim and extend elements

• Add chamfers and fillets

• Create precision graphics from a freehand sketch

• Change the color of elements

Tools that work with the drawing commands –IntelliSketch, Intent Zones, and Grid – allow you to
easily relate elements to each other, define your drawing intentions as you sketch, and provide
precise coordinate input relative to any key position in the drawing.

3-48 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing dynamics
As you draw, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the element you are drawing
(1). This display shows what the elements will look like if you click at the current cursor position.
Relationship icons also display where the cursor is positioned.

Until you click the point that completely defines the element that you are drawing, values in edit boxes
update as you move the cursor. This gives you constant feedback on the size and shape of the
element you are drawing. The command bar (2) for a particular sketch command contains additional
options to control the characteristics of the sketch element.

When you lock a value by typing it into a edit box, the dynamic display of the element you are drawing
shows that the value is locked. For example, if you lock the length of a line, the length of the dynamic
line does not change as you move the cursor to set the angle. If you want to free the dynamics for a
value, you can clear the highlighted value edit box by pressing the Backspace or Delete key.

Applying and displaying relationships


As you draw, IntelliSketch recognizes and applies 2D relationships that control element size, shape,
and position. When you make changes, relationships help the drawing retain the characteristics you
do not want altered.
When a relationship indicator is displayed at the cursor, you can click to apply that relationship. For
example, if the horizontal relationship indicator is displayed when you click to place the end point
of a line, the line will be drawn horizontal. You can also apply relationships to elements after you
draw them.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-49


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Relationship handles displayed on the 2D geometry show you how elements are related. You can
remove any relationship by deleting its handle. You can display or hide the relationship handles with
the Relationship Handles command.

Maintaining relationships

You can draw and modify 2D elements in the way that best suits your design needs. You can make
your assembly layouts and drawings associative by applying relationships, or you can draw them
freely, without relationships. When you draw 2D elements in a part document, 2D relationships
are maintained.
Maintaining relationships between 2D elements makes the elements associative (or related) to each
other. When you modify a 2D element that is related to another 2D element, the other element
updates automatically. For example, if you move a circle that has a tangent relationship with a line,
the line also moves so that the elements remain tangent.
You can draw elements freely, or non-associatively. When you modify a non-associative portion of an
assembly sketch or drawing, the changed elements move freely, without changing other portions of
the design. For example, if you move a circle that is tangent to a line (but does not have a tangent
relationship with the line) the line does not move with the circle.
To control whether you draw and modify 2D elements freely or associatively in layouts and drawings,
use the Maintain Relationships command in the Assembly and Draft environments.

Note
When you construct a synchronous feature using the 2D elements, the sketch elements
are moved to the Used Sketches collector in PathFinder.

3-50 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

How 2D relationships work

An element that has no relationships applied can be moved and changed in various ways. For
example, when there are no relationships between two lines (1), the lines can be moved and changed
without affecting each other. If you apply a perpendicular relationship between the two lines (2), and
move one line, the lines remain perpendicular.

When you apply a relationship between elements, the relationship is maintained when you modify
either element. For example:

• If a line and an arc share a tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.

• If a line and arc share a connect relationship, they remain connected when either is modified.

Relationships also maintain physical characteristics such as size, orientation, and position.

• You can make the size of two circles equal with an equal relationship.

• You can make the orientation of two lines parallel with a parallel relationship.

• You can connect a line and an arc with a connect relationship.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-51


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

A relationship can also maintain a physical characteristic of an individual element. For example, you
can make a line horizontal. The line remains horizontal even if you change its position and length.

Construction elements

For 2D elements you draw in a part or assembly document, you can specify that the element is a
considered a construction element. Use the Construction command on the Sketching tab to
change selected sketch elements to construction elements. Construction elements are not used to
construct features—they are used only as drawing aids. The line style for a construction element
is dashed.

Create as Construction elements

Use the Create as Construction command on the Sketching tab to change the mode to
construction. All sketch elements created in this mode are construction elements. Click the command
again to return to profile element mode.

Intent Zones

Solid Edge uses intent zones to interpret your intentions as you draw and modify elements. Intent
zones allow you to draw and modify elements many ways using few commands. You do not need to
select a different command for every type of element.

How intent zones work

When you click to begin drawing certain elements, the software divides the region around the clicked
position into four intent zone quadrants. For example, when drawing a line that is connected to a
circle, four intent zones are displayed around the point you clicked (1).

Two of these intent zones allow you to draw the line tangent to the circle. The other two intent zones
allow you to draw the line perpendicular to, or at some other orientation relative to the circle.

3-52 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

By moving the cursor through one of these intent zones on the way to your next click location, you
can tell the software what you want to do next. This allows you to control whether the line is tangent
to the circle (1), perpendicular to the circle (2), or at some other orientation (3).

The last intent zone you move the cursor into is the active zone. To change the active intent zone,
move the cursor back into the zone circle, and then move the cursor out through the intent zone
quadrant to the position where you want to click next.

Intent zone size

You can change the size of the intent zones with the IntelliSketch command. The Intent Zone option
on the Cursor tab on the IntelliSketch dialog box allows you to set the intent zone size.

Drawing lines tangent or connected to curved elements

Using intent zones with the Line command, you can draw a line tangent to a circle or arc. Or you can
draw a line that is connected to the circle or arc, but not tangent to it.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-53


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

To draw an line tangent to a circle, first click a point on the circle (1) to place the first end point of
the line. Then move the cursor through the tangent intent zone. As you move the cursor, the line
remains tangent to the circle. Position the cursor where you want the second end point of the line
(2), then click to place the second end point.

If you do not want the line to be tangent to the circle, you can move the cursor back into the intent
zone region and out through one of the perpendicular zones (1) before clicking to place the second
end point of the line. When you move the cursor through the perpendicular zones, you can also draw
the line such that it is not perpendicular to the circle (2) and (3).

The Line command also allows you to draw a connected series of lines and arcs. You can use the L
and A keys on the keyboard to switch from line mode to arc mode. When you switch modes, intent
zones (1) and (2) are displayed at the last click point.

The intent zones allow you to control whether the new element is tangent to, perpendicular to, or at
some other orientation to the previous element.

3-54 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing tangent or perpendicular arcs

You can use intent zones to change the result of the Tangent Arc command. To draw an arc tangent
to a line, first click a point on the line to place the first end point of the arc. Then move the cursor
through the tangent intent zone and click to place the second end point of the arc.

If you do not want the arc to be tangent to the line, you can move the cursor back into the intent zone
region and out through the perpendicular zone before clicking to place the second end point of the arc.

Drawing arcs by three points

When you use the Arc By 3 Points command, intent zones allow you to input the three points in any
order. You can also use intent zones to change the arc direction. The intent zone used with the Arc
By 3 Points command is not divided into quadrants.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-55


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Construction Geometry
You can use construction geometry to help you draw and constrain a profile, but the construction
geometry is not used to construct the surfaces for the feature. When the feature is created, the
construction geometry is ignored.
Use one of the following methods to create construction geometry:

• The Create as Construction command is a toggle. When selected, all sketch elements
are created as construction elements. Select the command again and all sketch elements are
created as profile elements.

• The Construction command is used to change a profile element or sketch element into a
construction element.

• Construction elements use the double-chain line style so you can distinguish them from other
elements.

• For example, you can use 45 degree construction lines to control the location of the tabs on
the profile or sketch.

• The construction lines make it easier to edit the location of the tabs, but the construction lines are
not used to produce the solid model.

3-56 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Modifying 2D elements

Solid Edge provides a wide range of tools for modifying 2D elements. 2D drawing and modification
tools work together smoothly, so that you can modify your profiles, sketches, and 2D drawings as
you work.

Using element handles

You can change the size, position, or orientation of an element with the cursor. When you select an
element with the Select tool, its handles are displayed at key positions.

You can change the shape of a selected element by dragging one of its handles. The first figure
shows the effect of dragging an end point handle. The second figure shows the effect of dragging
the midpoint handle.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-57


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Moving and copying elements with the mouse

You can also drag a selected element to move it without changing its shape. Position the cursor so it
is not over a handle, then drag the element to another location.

To copy an element, hold the Ctrl key while you drag.

Applying relationships between elements

You can apply geometric relationships as you draw or after you draw. To apply a geometric
relationship onto an existing element, select a relationship command and then select the element to
which you want to add the relationship. When you apply a relationship to an element, the element is
modified to reflect the new relationship.

If a line and arc are not tangent (A), applying a tangent relationship modifies one or both elements
to make them tangent (B).

When you use relationship commands, the software allows you to select only elements that are valid
input for that command. For example, when you use the Concentric command, the command allows
you to select only circles, arcs, and ellipses.

3-58 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Changing relationships

You can delete a relationship as you would delete any other element by selecting a relationship
handle, then press the Delete key.

Dimensions as relationships

Driving dimensions are relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size,
orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on or between elements,
you can change the measured elements by editing the dimensional value. You do not have to delete
or redraw elements at different sizes.
For example, you can dimension the radius of an arc to maintain its size (A), and then edit the value
of the radius dimension to change its size (B).

To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements you want
to control.

Changing elements with relationships

When you modify 2D elements, elements with maintained relationships automatically update to honor
the relationship. For example, if you move an element that shares a parallel relationship with another
element, the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a line and an arc share a tangent
relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.
If you want to change an element by adding or removing a relationship, and the element does
not change the way you expect, it may be controlled by a driving dimension. You can toggle the
dimension from driving to driven, then make the change.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-59


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Element modification: trimming, extending, splitting, filleting, chamfering, offsetting, and


stretching
Whether your sketching technique is to start big and whittle away or to start small and build up,
relationships make it possible to sketch and evolve, rather than draw every element to its exact
measurements. Solid Edge modification tools allow you to change a sketch and still maintain
applied relationships.
Solid Edge provides commands to trim, extend, or split elements.

The Trim command trims an element back to the intersection with another element. To use the
command, click on the part to trim.

You can trim one or more elements by dragging the cursor across the part to trim.

You can also select the elements you want to trim to. This selection overrides the default option of
trimming to the next element only. To select an element to trim to, press the Ctrl key while selecting
the element to trim to. For example, in normal operations, if you selected line (A) as the element
to be trimmed, it would be trimmed at the intersection of the next element (B). However, you can
select the edges (C) and (D) as the elements to trim to and the element will be trimmed at the
intersection of those edges.

3-60 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

The Trim Corner command creates a corner by extending two open elements to their intersection.

The Extend to Next command extends an open element to the next element. To do this, select the
element and then click the mouse near the end to extend.

You can also select an element to extend to. This selection overrides the default option of extending
to the next element only. To select an element to extend to, press the Ctrl key while selecting the
element to extend to. For example, in normal operations, if you selected line (A) as the element
to be extended, it would be extended to the intersection of the next element (B). However, you can
select edge (C) to extend the line to that edge.

The Split command splits an open or closed element at the location you specify. When splitting
elements, appropriate geometric relationships are applied automatically. For example, when splitting
an arc, a connect relationship (A) is applied at the split point, and a concentric relationship (B) is
applied at the center point of the arcs.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-61


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Fillet and Chamfer commands combine drawing and trimming operations.

The Offset command draws a uniform-offset copy of selected elements.

You cannot select model edges with this command. If you want to offset model edges, use the
Include command.
The Symmetric Offset command draws a symmetrically offset copy of a selected centerline.

The Stretch command moves elements within the fence and stretches elements that overlap the
fence.

3-62 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Relationships are added or removed as necessary during element modification. If you trim part of a
circle and more than one arc remains, concentric and equal relationships are applied between the
remaining arcs.

For example, you typically begin designing with key design parameters. You would draw known
design elements in proper relation to one another (A) and then draw additional elements to fill in
the blanks (B).

As you draw, you may need to modify elements to create a valid profile, or to make a drawing look the
way you want it to (C-F). You can use modification commands such as Trim and Extend to modify
the elements. The relationships are maintained and additional relationships are applied.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-63


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Element manipulation: rotating, scaling, mirroring, copying, and deleting

Tools are provided for moving, rotating, scaling, and mirroring elements. These tools can also be
used for copying. For example, you can make a mirror copy, or you can cut or copy 2D elements from
another application and paste them into the profile window, the assembly sketch window, or a drawing.

When you manipulate elements that have relationships, the relationships are retained when possible.
For example, if you make a copy of two related elements, the relationship is also copied. However, if
you copy one of two elements that are related to each other, the relationship is not copied.
Relationships that are no longer applicable after a manipulation are automatically deleted. For
example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel lines, the parallel relationship is deleted from the
remaining line.

The Rotate command turns or turns and copies 2D elements about an axis. The command requires
you to specify a center point for the rotation (A), a point to rotate from (B), and a point to rotate to (C).

3-64 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

The Scale command uses a scale factor to proportionally scale or scale and copy 2D elements.
The Mirror command mirrors or mirror copies 2D elements about a line or two points.

The Delete command removes 2D elements from the profile or sketch window.

Applying colors and patterns to closed boundaries

A boundary in a Solid Edge drawing, sketch, or profile can be filled with a pattern or solid color.

A fill is like other elements in that you can format it and move it around, but the fill is always associated
with a boundary. The boundary can be made up of more than one element.

Modifying fills

A fill can exist only inside a closed boundary. A fill is associative, which means it maintains its original
orientation to an element regardless of the way you manipulate the element. For example, if you
move the boundary, the fill moves with it. If you change the boundary, the fill changes to conform to
the new boundary area. You can delete a fill the same way you would delete an element.

Fill insertion point

• When you click inside an object to fill it, the cursor location designates the fill insertion point.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-65


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

• The fill insertion point is also the fill handle. You can select the fill handle and drag the fill to
another object.

• If you use the Redo Fill option to refill the area based on a new boundary, the insertion point
designates which side of the object will be refilled.

Formatting fills

Formatting a fill is similar to applying formats to an element. You can apply unique formats to fills with
the Properties command or by setting options on the Fill command bar. To make several fills look the
same, you can apply a fill style by selecting the style on the command bar.
The software provides fill styles for various engineering standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and AIA. You
can modify an existing fill style or create a new one with the Style command.

3-66 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketch geometric relationships


The sketch relationship commands are located on the Sketching tab (1) in the Relate group (2).

In synchronous modeling, the sketch relationships are not applied the feature created from them.
The system automatically detects how faces relate to each other.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-67


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Geometric Relationships
Geometric relationships control the orientation of an element with respect to another element or
reference plane. For example, you can define a tangent relationship between a line and an arc. If the
adjoining elements change, the tangent relationship is maintained between the elements.

Geometric relationships control how a sketch changes when edits are made. IntelliSketch displays
and places geometric relationships as you draw. After you complete the sketch, you can use
the various relationship commands and the Relationship Assistant to apply additional geometric
relationships.

3-68 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Relationship Handles

Relationship handles are symbols used to represent a geometric relationship between elements,
keypoints, and dimensions, or between keypoints and elements. The relationship handle shows that
the designated relationship is being maintained.
Relationship Handle
Collinear
Connect (1 degree of freedom)
Connect (2 degrees of freedom)
Concentric
Equal
Horizontal/Vertical
Tangent
Tangent (Tangent + Equal Curvature)
Tangent (Parallel Tangent Vectors)
Tangent (Parallel Tangent Vectors + Equal Curvature)

Symmetric
Parallel
Perpendicular
Fillet
Chamfer
Link (local)
Link (peer-to-peer)
Link (sketch to sketch)
Rigid Set (2-D elements)

In some cases, more than one relationship may be required and displayed at the same location on
the profile. For example, a connect relationship and a tangent relationship can be used where
an arc meets a line.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-69


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Displaying Parents for a Relationship

When modifying a profile or sketch, it can be useful to determine the parent elements for a
relationship. When you select a geometric relationship, the parents highlight. For example, when you
select the horizontal relationship shown in the first illustration, the left vertical line and the circle are
highlighted as the parent elements.

This can be useful when multiple relationships are in the same location and you need to delete one
relationship. In this situation, you can use QuickPick to highlight the relationship, and the parent
elements are displayed using a dashed line style.

Collinear

The Collinear command forces two lines to be collinear. If the angle of one of the lines changes, the
second line changes its angle and position to remain collinear with the first.

3-70 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Connect

The Connect command joins a keypoint on one element to another element, or element keypoint. For
example, you can apply a connect relationship between the endpoints of two elements. Establishing
a connect relationship between element endpoints helps you draw a closed sketch. The symbol for
connected endpoints displays a dot at the center of a rectangle.

You can also use the Connect command to connect the endpoint of an element to any point
on another element, not necessarily an endpoint or keypoint. This is called a point-on-element
connection, and the symbol resembles an X. For example, the endpoint of the top horizontal line on
the right side of the profile is connected to the vertical line, but not at an endpoint.

When drawing profiles, pay close attention to the relationship indicator symbols that IntelliSketch
displays, and try to draw the elements as accurately as possible. Otherwise, you may accidentally
apply a connect relationship in the wrong location, which can result in an invalid profile. For example,
for a base feature you may accidentally create an open profile, rather than the required closed profile.

Tangent

The Tangent command maintains tangency between two elements or element groups.

When you apply a tangent relationship, you can use the Tangent command bar to specify the type of
tangent relationship you want:
• Tangent

• Tangent + Equal Curvature

• Parallel Tangent Vectors

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-71


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

• Parallel Tangent Vectors + Equal Curvature

A simple tangent relationship is useful when you want a line and an arc, or two arcs to remain tangent.
The other options are useful in situations where a b-spline curve must blend smoothly with other
elements. The Tangent + Equal Curvature, Parallel Tangent Vectors, and Parallel Tangent Vectors +
Equal Curvature options require that the first element you select is a b-spline curve.

Note
You can also apply a tangent or connect relationship to an end-point connected series of
elements to define a profile group. For more information on profile groups, see the Working
With Profile Groups topic.

Perpendicular

The Perpendicular command maintains a 90-degree angle between two elements.

Horizontal/Vertical

The Horizontal/Vertical command works in two modes. In one mode, you can fix the orientation
of a line as either horizontal or vertical by selecting any point on the line that is not an endpoint or
a midpoint.

In the second mode, you can apply vertical/horizontal relationships between graphic elements by
aligning their midpoints, center points, or endpoints so that their positions remain aligned with
respect to each other.

3-72 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Equal

The Equal command maintains size equality between similar elements. When this relationship is
applied between two lines, their lengths become equal. When applied between two arcs, their radii
become equal.

Parallel

The Parallel command makes two lines share the same angled orientation.

Concentric

The Concentric command maintains coincident centers for arcs and circles.

Symmetric

You can use the Symmetric command to make elements symmetric about a line or reference plane.
The Symmetric command captures both the location and size of the elements.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-73


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Rigid Set

You can use the Rigid Set command to add a rigid set relationship to a group of 2-D elements.

3-74 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing Tools
Solid Edge provides tools to help you draw quickly and precisely in a variety of situations.
Grid
Grids help you draw with precision when the endpoints of elements you are drawing fit within
regular intervals.
IntelliSketch
IntelliSketch helps you create, and optionally maintain, geometric relationships between
elements. As you draw, IntelliSketch recognizes the opportunity to relate new elements to
existing elements and displays visual cues that help make elements connected, tangent,
collinear, perpendicular, parallel, and so forth.
Based on your preference, Solid Edge will either maintain the relationships that IntelliSketch
creates or only use IntelliSketch to create new elements with precision, without maintaining
relationships as you add and change geometry.
FreeSketch
The FreeSketch command initiates a freehand drawing tool that you can use to sketch lines,
arcs, circles and rectangles. As you press and hold the mouse button and drag the cursor across
the drawing sheet, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the mouse button,
the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns them into a precise drawing.

To learn how, see Draw with FreeSketch.


Projection Lines
Projection lines help you maintain alignment of key points, for example between related 2D
Drawing Views of a model. Projection lines fulfill the function of the squares, triangles, and
parallel rules used in classical drafting.
Sketch Cleanup
Use the Clean Sketch command in the Draw group to remove redundant and unwanted elements
from a sketch.

Working with grids

The grid helps you draw and modify elements relative to known positions in the working window. It
displays a series of intersecting lines or points, and X and Y coordinates, which enable you to draw
2D elements with precision. You can use the grid with all sketching, dimensioning, and annotation
functions. It also works with IntelliSketch and the Select command.
For example, you can use the grid to:

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-75


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

• Draw elements at known locations, draw elements known distances apart, and so forth. When
the Show Grid option is set, the grid is displayed whenever you create or modify 2D elements.
For an example, see Help topic Draw a line with a grid.

• Align dimensions and annotations by snapping them to grid points or lines. Only bolt hole
circles and center marks cannot be snapped to a grid. For an example, see Help topic Place a
dimension or annotation using a grid.

synchronous environment

ordered environment

3-76 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Grid display and setting options

You can use the Grid Options command to open the Grid Options dialog box, where you can specify
grid appearance and turn grid display options on and off. For easy access, some of the options
also are available as commands on the ribbon.

You can do this Using these options in the Or selecting this command on
dialog box the ribbon
Display the grid. Show Grid, plus one of the Show Grid
following:
• As Lines

• As Points
Turn alignment lines on and off. Show Alignment Lines Not available
Turn snap-to-grid on and off. Show Grid, plus one of the Snap to Grid
following:
• Using Lines

• Using Points
Turn coordinate display on and Show Readouts Not available
off.
Change grid spacing. Angle Not available
Major Line Spacing
Minor Spaces Per Major
Enter X and Y coordinates for the Enable Key-ins (X,Y) XY Key-in
next point.

Display X and Y alignment lines. Show Alignment Lines Not available


Change grid line color. Major Line Color Not available
Minor Line Color
Change grid origin line colors On the Colors tab in the Solid Not available
Edge Options dialog box, change
the Select and Highlight colors.

Grid shortcut keys

You can use the following shortcut keys while working with grids:

You can do this Using these shortcut keys


Reposition grid to current cursor position. F8
Turn snap-to-grid on and off. F9
Reset the grid origin point to zero. F12
Displays the X and Y coordinate input boxes, with Alt+X
the cursor in the X box.
Displays the X and Y coordinate input boxes, with Alt+Y
the cursor in the Y box.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-77


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

How grids work in the ordered environment

The grid is displayed in Draft and in profile and sketch mode as you draw, dimension, and annotate 2D
elements. The X and Y coordinates it displays are relative to an origin point (A), which you can position
anywhere in the window. The origin point is marked by the intersection of the X and Y origin lines.
As you move the cursor, the horizontal and vertical distance between the cursor position and the
origin point is dynamically displayed (B).
If the Snap To Grid option is on when you add dimensions and annotations, they will snap to grid
lines and points.

How grids work in the synchronous environment

The grid is available for drawing and editing 2D elements, and for adding 2D dimensions and
annotations.
Grid visibility is somewhat different in Draft than in synchronous modeling environments. In Draft,
when the grid is turned on, it is always visible. In synchronous modeling, the grid is visible only
when a sketch plane is locked.
In 3D environments, the grid helps you draw horizontally and vertically with respect to part edges and
model faces by displaying a series of intersecting lines or points, and by displaying alignment lines.
The grid also helps you draw with precision by displaying X and Y coordinates that are relative to an
origin point (A), which you can position anywhere in the window.

3-78 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

As you move the cursor, the horizontal and vertical distance (B) and orientation between the cursor
position and the origin point is displayed and updated.

If the Snap To Grid option is on when you add dimensions and annotations, they will snap to grid
lines and points.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-79


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Recognizing the grid origin

The grid origin is marked by the intersection of the X and Y origin lines.
• In ordered profile and sketch, the default display mode is a red dashed line for the X axis and a
green dashed line for the Y axis. The user-defined grid origin point is marked by a circle and dot.
The default origin is at the center of the profile or sketch reference plane.

• In Draft, the default display mode is a red dashed line for the X axis and a magenta dashed line
for the Y axis. The user-defined grid origin point is marked by a concentric circle and dot. The
default origin is the (0,0) location of the drawing sheet.

• In the synchronous modeling environment, the default display color scheme matches that of the
user-defined origin triad in the center of the graphics window. The X axis is a red line, and
the Y axis is green. These lines are solid in the positive direction and dashed in the negative
direction. There is no marker at the user-defined origin point. The default origin is the 0,0,0
center of the currently locked sketch plane.

3-80 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Moving the grid origin

You can move the grid origin point using either of these commands:

• Use the Reposition Origin command to move the origin to a user-defined location. This is
helpful when you want to do any of the following:
o Add dimensions or constraints that are horizontal or vertical to a model edge.

o Draw lines and other elements at a precise distance from another element at a known
location.

o Offset a series of elements by the same distance from a known location.

• To automatically reset the origin point to match the origin of the drawing sheet or working plane,
use the Zero Origin command .

Note
The Reposition Origin and Zero Origin commands are available in synchronous modeling
environments only when a sketch plane is locked.

See the Help topic, Reposition the grid origin point.

Changing the grid orientation

In ordered profile and sketch, the default orientation for the x-axis of the grid is horizontal to the
profile or sketch reference plane. You can reorient the x-axis to any angle using the Angle option on
the Grid Options dialog box.
In the synchronous modeling environment, the orientation of the grid axes matches the origin axes
of the currently locked sketch plane. When you lock onto a different sketch plane, the origin axes
reorient to the new plane. You can use the Reposition Origin command to do the following:
• Change the grid angle. See the Help topic, Reposition the sketch plane origin.

• Ensure that dimensions placed on coplanar geometry remain horizontal and vertical. See the
Help topic, Set sketch plane horizontal and vertical for dimensioning.

In Draft, the default orientation for the X-axis of the grid is horizontal. You can reorient the X-axis to
any angle using the Angle option on the Grid Options dialog box.

IntelliSketch

IntelliSketch is a dynamic drawing tool used for sketching and modifying elements. IntelliSketch
allows you to sketch with precision by specifying characteristics of the design as you sketch.
For instance, IntelliSketch allows you to sketch a line that is horizontal or vertical, or a line that is
parallel or perpendicular to another line or tangent to a circle. You can also draw an arc connected to
the end point of an existing line, draw a circle concentric with another circle, draw a line tangent to a
circle—the possibilities are too numerous to list.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-81


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

IntelliSketch places dimensions and geometric relationships on any new 2D elements as you draw
them. You can use another tool, the Relationship Assistant, to place dimensions and relationships
automatically on existing profile elements.

How IntelliSketch works

As you draw, IntelliSketch tracks the movement of the cursor and shows a temporary, dynamic
display of the element you are drawing. This temporary display shows what the new element will look
like if you click at the current position.
IntelliSketch gives you more information about the element you are drawing by displaying
relationships between the temporary, dynamic element and the following:
• Other elements in the drawing

• Horizontal and vertical orientations

• The origin of the element you are drawing

When IntelliSketch recognizes a relationship, it displays a relationship indicator at the cursor. As


you move the cursor, IntelliSketch updates the indicator to show new relationships. If a relationship
indicator is displayed at the cursor when you click to draw the element, the software applies that
relationship to the element. For example, if the Horizontal relationship indicator appears when you
click to place the second end point of a line, then the line will be horizontal.

IntelliSketch relationships

You can set the types of relationships you want IntelliSketch to recognize on the Relationships page
on the IntelliSketch dialog box. IntelliSketch can recognize one or two relationships at a time. When
IntelliSketch recognizes two relationships, it displays both relationship indicators at the cursor.

3-82 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

IntelliSketch locate zone

You do not have to move the cursor to an exact position for IntelliSketch to recognize a relationship.
IntelliSketch recognizes relationships for any element within the locate zone of the cursor. The circle
around the cursor crosshair or at the end of the cursor arrow indicates the locate zone. You can
change the size of the locate zone in the IntelliSketch options dialog.

Alignment indicators

IntelliSketch displays a temporary dashed line to indicate when the cursor position is horizontally or
vertically aligned with a key point on an element.

Infinite elements

IntelliSketch recognizes the Point On Element relationship for lines and arcs as if these elements
were infinite. In the following example, IntelliSketch recognizes a Point On Element relationship when
the cursor is positioned directly over an element and also when the cursor is moved off the element.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-83


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Circle and arc keypoints

IntelliSketch displays indicators at the center point, silhouette points, endpoints, and midpoint of
an arc. A circle displays indicators at the center and silhouette points. This makes these keypoints
easy to locate.

Snapping to points

When drawing and manipulating 2D elements, you can use shortcut keys with QuickPick to snap to
keypoints and intersection points. This also applies the point coordinates as input to the command in
progress.
Once you have highlighted the element you want to snap to with the cursor, you can use these
shortcut keys to snap to points:
• Midpoint - press M.

• Intersection point - press I.

• Center point - press C.

• Endpoint - press E.

To learn more, see Selecting and snapping to points.

3-84 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sweep angle lock at quadrants

When you draw tangent or perpendicular arcs, the arc sweep angle locks at quadrant points of 0,
90, 180, and 270 degrees. This allows you to draw common arcs without typing the sweep value
on the command bar.

Automatic dimensioning

You can use options on the Auto-Dimension page in the IntelliSketch dialog box to automatically
create dimensions for new geometry. The page provides several options to control when the
dimensions are drawn as well as whether to use dimension style mapping or not.
You can use the Auto-Dimension command as a quick way to turn automatic dimensioning on and off.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-85


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Example: Draw a horizontal line

You can use IntelliSketch to draw a horizontal line. You can apply a horizontal relationship as you
draw the line, or draw the line without a horizontal relationship.

1. Choose the IntelliSketch command on the Home tab or the Sketching tab.

2. In the IntelliSketch dialog box, on the Relationships tab, set the Horizontal Or Vertical
option, and then click OK.

3. Choose the Line command.

4. Click where you want to place the first end point of the line, anywhere in the application window
(1).

5. Move the cursor around in the window (2). Notice that the dynamic line display always extends
from the end point you just placed to the current cursor position. You may also see IntelliSketch
relationship indicators displayed at the cursor.

6. Move the cursor to make the dynamic line approximately horizontal.

7. When the IntelliSketch Horizontal relationship indicator is displayed at the cursor (3), click to
place the second end point.

IntelliSketch places a horizontal relationship handle on the new line (4).

Tip
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with the Relationship Handles command.

3-86 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Tip
To snap to an intersection point or a keypoint, locate the element(s) with the cursor and then
press one of these shortcut keys.
• Midpoint of a line or arc: press M.

• Intersection point of lines, circle, curves, and arcs: press I.

• Center point of a circle or arc: press C.

• Endpoint of a line, arc, or curve: press E.

For intersection points—If there are multiple eligible points located, then QuickPick opens
and lists them. In QuickPick, click to select the point you want.

Example: Draw a line connected to another line

You can use IntelliSketch to connect an element you are drawing with an existing element. You can
apply a connect relationship as you draw the lines, or draw the line without a connect relationship.

1. Choose the IntelliSketch command .

2. In the IntelliSketch dialog box, on the Relationships tab, set the End Point option, and then
click OK.

3. Choose the Line command.

4. Move the cursor to the end of a line in the application window. As you move the cursor over it, the
line is highlighted and IntelliSketch displays the End Point relationship indicator at the cursor.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-87


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

5. While IntelliSketch displays the relationship indicator, click to place the first end point of the new
line (1). This end point is connected to the end point of the previous line.

Tip
Rather than clicking, you can snap to the line end point nearest the cursor by pressing
the E key.

6. Click where you want to place the second end point of the new line. You can enter values in
the length and angle fields.

7. The new line and the previous line have connected end points (2).

IntelliSketch places a connect relationship handle at the point where the two lines connect (3).

Tip
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with the Relationship Handles command.

Tip
Relationships are maintained only if the Maintain Relationships command is set.

Tip
To snap to a keypoint or intersection point, locate the element(s) with the cursor and then
press one of these shortcut keys.
• Midpoint of a line or arc: press M.

• Intersection point of lines, circle, curves, and arcs: press I.

• Center point of a circle or arc: press C.

• Endpoint of a line, arc, or curve: press E.

For intersection points—If there are multiple eligible points located, then QuickPick opens
and lists them. In QuickPick, click to select the point you want.

3-88 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Projection lines

Projection lines are extensions of lines that assist in 2D drawing.


• You can use projection lines to help you create new geometry, and any constraints you create
with them remain active even after you turn projection lines off. For example, in a drawing, you
can use projection lines on an auxiliary view to enable creation of additional views with proper
alignment and size.

• You can create a line with the projection line option set, or you can edit an existing line and
set the projection line property later.

• You can place dimensions and annotations to projection lines. Dimensions and annotations
connect to the defining segment of the projection line (the original 2D line on which the projection
line is based).

Projection lines are available as a line property on the Line command bar and on the Format page of
the Element Properties dialog box.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-89


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Distance and area measurement


You can measure distances or areas, even when you are in the middle of another task. To set
the units for measuring distances or areas, use the Properties→File Properties command on
the Application menu.

Measuring distances in 2D

In the Draft environment, you can measure distance using the Measure Distance command. These
commands measure linear distances or measure the cumulative linear distance along a series of
points. The first point you select establishes the origin of the measurement (A). After that, you can
select any keypoint to see the distance between it and the origin, as well as the delta distance
along each principal axis (B).

Selecting the keypoint adds it to a series of measurement points. Then you can select another point
to see the new linear distance and deltas (C), or to see the distance between the last two points and
the total cumulative distance from the origin to the last point (D). Use right-click to reset the command.

3-90 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Measuring distances and angles in 3D

In the Part, Sheet Metal, and Assembly environments, the Measure Distance command measures
linear distances. The first point you select establishes the origin of the measurement (A). After that,
you can select any keypoint (B) to display the Measure Distance dialog box which displays the
keypoint select type, the true distance, the apparent screen view distance, and the delta distance
along each principal axis.

In the Part, Sheet Metal, and Assembly environments, the Measure Angle command measures
angles. You can measure between any two faces or between any three points.

Measuring minimum distances

In the Part, Sheet Metal, and Assembly environments, you can use the Measure Minimum
Distance command to measure the minimum distance between any two elements or keypoints.
You can use the Select Type option on the Minimum Distance command bar to filter which type
of elements you want to select. When working in the context of an assembly, you can also use the
Activate Part option to activate the parts you want to measure.

Measuring normal distances

In the Part, Sheet Metal, and Assembly environments, the Measure Normal Distance command
measures normal distances between a planar element or line and a keypoint. You can use the
Element Types option on the Measure Normal Distance command bar to filter which type of
elements you want to select. You can use the Key Point option to specify the type of keypoint you
want to identify when measuring the distance. You can use the Coordinate System option to select
a user-defined coordinate system to define one of the points. If you use a coordinate system, the
returned values will be relative to the specified coordinate system. When working in the context of an
assembly, you can also use the Activate Part option to activate the parts you want to measure.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-91


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Measuring areas

The Measure Area command, available only in the Draft environment and in 2D profiles and
sketches, measures the area inside a closed boundary (A). You can also measure the cumulative
area inside more than one closed boundary by holding the Shift key as you select elements (B). Each
click displays the area of the last element along with the total area. You can reset the command by
selecting another element without holding the Shift key.

Measuring lengths

The Measure Total Length command measures the cumulative length of a select set of 2D geometry.

Measuring automatically

In addition to the individual distance, area, length, and angle commands, you can use the Smart
Measure command in 2D and 3D environments to measure automatically based on what you select:
• Select a single 2D element or 3D object to measure its length or its angle or radius.

• Select two or more 2D elements or 3D objects to measure the distance or angle between them.

The Smart Measure command works like the Smart Dimension command, except that it does not
place a dimension as a result.

Copying measurement values

You can copy the highlighted measurement value to the Clipboard by pressing Ctrl+C. You can then
use the copied value as input for another command. For example, you can paste the copied value
into the Line command bar to define the length of a line. Use the Tab key if you want to highlight a
different value.

3-92 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Measuring drawing view geometry

When you measure model geometry within a drawing view, or when you measure distances
between model edges in two drawing views, you can select the Use Drawing View Scale check
box on the command bar to specify that the measured value is displayed using the equivalent of the
model distance.
Alternatively, you can apply a user-defined scale value by selecting it from the Scale list on the
command bar.
When measuring between drawing views, they must be views of the same model and they must
use the same view rotation and orientation. For example, you can measure between an edge in a
front view and an edge in a detail view with the same front orientation, but not between a front
view and a side view.

Note
• You can show the scale of a drawing view using the General page (Drawing View
Properties dialog box).

• User-defined scale values are defined in the Drawing View Scales section of the
Custom.xml file, in the C:\Program Files\Solid Edge ST9\Preferences folder. See the
Help topic, Add custom drawing view scales to Solid Edge.

Example: Measuring the length of a line

Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances with the Measure Distance
command. For example, consider the following workflow.
1. Use the Line command to draw a line (A).

2. On the Inspect tab, click the Measure Distance command and measure a distance (B).

Note
You do not need to exit the Line command before measuring a distance.

3. To exit the Measure Distance command, right-click. The Line command is still active-you can
pick up where you left off.

4. Continue using the Line command (C).

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-93


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Dimensioning sketches
Dimensioning commands are located in the Dimension group on the Home, Sketching, and PMI
tabs.

3-94 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Locked dimensions
Sketch dimensions are placed as driving. A driving dimension is colored red. A driving dimension is
also referred to as a locked dimension. A locked dimension cannot change unless it is edited directly.
As sketch geometry is modified, a locked dimension does not change.
Change a dimension to driven (or unlocked) by selecting the dimension and then clicking the lock on
the Dimension command bar. A driven dimension is colored blue. A driven dimension value cannot
be selected for editing. It must be changed to a locked dimension to change its value directly.

To change a dimension value of a locked dimension, click the dimension value and enter a new value.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-95


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Dimension orientation
The orientation of a sketch dimension is controlled by the sketch plane origin. The sketch plane
origin defines the horizontal/vertical direction.

The Sketch View command (or press Ctrl+H) orients the view to where the dimension
text is horizontal.

3-96 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Dimension style
Modify the dimension style settings in the Style dialog box. The Style command is located on the
View tab (1) in the Style group (2).

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-97


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Creating profiles with text

You use the Text Profile command to draw a profile or sketch that includes text. The Text dialog
box is where you specify the text characteristics you want, such as the font and size. You can use the
Text Profile command bar to choose an anchor point that provides the best alignment of the text.
When creating text features that go all the way through a part, such as with sheet metal parts, you
should use the Solid Edge Stencil font. This font was designed for these situations, and ensures
that the part can be manufactured.

3-98 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Text Profile command

Use the Text Profile command to place text as sketch geometry. This allows you to construct
features that represent text on your parts, such as labels and stamped numbers. You also can use
text profiles as embossed text features.
When placing a text profile, it displays in a box by default:

If you place it along an analytic, such as an arc, it acts like this:

You also can place it along a curve, like this:

Note
To place a text profile along an arc or a curve, the Point On Element option on the
Relationships tab on the IntelliSketch dialog box must be set.

After you create a text profile, you can use the Extrude command to generate a 3D text feature.

Text profile workflow


The Text Profile workflow consists of two steps:
1. Specifying the text and text formatting.

2. Specifying the text profile orientation and location.

Specifying the text


When creating and editing a text profile, the Text dialog box is where you type the text as you want it
to display on the feature and specify its formatting. Formatting options include font type, font style,
and size, letter spacing, line spacing, and its horizontal alignment (left, center, right). Press the Enter
key to create multi-line text and to insert lines to create paragraphs.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-99


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Font Selection

• When creating text features that go all the way through a part, such as with sheet metal parts, it is
a good idea to use the Solid Edge Stencil font. This font was designed for manufacturing.

• In a sheet metal part, you use a stick font text profile for etching.

The width of the text profile is determined by the width of the longest line of text typed in the Text
dialog box. Its height is defined by the number of lines of text typed. You can control the spacing
between the text and the text profile boundary box by changing the Margin setting.

Specifying text orientation and location

You place a text profile by specifying one of nine possible anchor points on the text, and then clicking
a placement point in the graphics window.
Use the Anchor button on the Text Profile command bar to set the anchor point for the text. The
anchor point can be any of the following:

Anchor Point Effect on Text Profile

Top Left

3-100 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Anchor Point Effect on Text Profile

Top Center

Top Right

Center Left

Center Center

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-101


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Anchor Point Effect on Text Profile

Center Right

Bottom Left

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

A target cursor is displayed and attached to the text profile box at the specified anchor point. As you
move the cursor around the graphics window, the text profile box moves with it. The target cursor can
locate keypoints, lines, alignment indicators, centers, and edges. To be selectable, the elements must
reside in the same sketch as the text profile.

3-102 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

When you click to place the text profile, the anchor point is matched to the placement point. If you
click a keypoint, a connect relationship is established between the text profile box and the element.
• To place a text profile along a curve or arc so that the text follows the curve, locate and click the
start point or the end point of the curve or arc.

• To create a vertical text profile, click a vertical line in the profile or sketch.

You can reposition a text profile by selecting and moving it. In 3D environments, you may need to
use QuickPick to select only the text profile.
If the text profile object is constrained, click the Reposition button on the Text Profile command
bar to delete the anchor constraint and then move the text profile.

Text placement options

Depending upon what types of elements you locate with the target cursor, PromptBar may display
prompts for one or more of these additional placement options. For example, before you click to place
the text profile, you can press T to change the orientation of the text.

Before placing multiline text along a curve or arc, you can press N to choose an alternative display
option.

Note
You can attach text to a line in the sketch, and then use the Rotate command to rotate the
line and the attached text.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-103


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Place text as a profile

You use the Text Profile command to draw text-shaped profiles for features that represent text
on parts, sheet metal, and drawings.

1. In the synchronous environment, choose Sketching tab→Insert group→Text Profile .


In the ordered environment, you must be in sketch mode. Draw an ordered sketch of a part, or
edit an existing sketch, and then choose the Tools tab→Insert group→Text Profile.

Note
Use Command Finder to find the command in your current environment.

See the help topic, Find a command with Command Finder.

2. In the Text dialog box, type the text for the profile, or paste text into the dialog box from another
source. Set formatting options, and then click OK.

3. On the Text Profile command bar, in the Text Step group, click the Anchor button and then click
an anchor point for the text profile box. The default anchor point is top-left.

4. In the graphics window, move the target cursor to position the text, and then click to place it.

Tip
• In a synchronous part or sheet metal model, you can highlight a plane or model face on
which to place the text profile, and then press F3 to lock it.

• When placing multiline text with respect to geometry, you may see additional orientation
options displayed in PromptBar. Watch for prompts such as press N for multiline options
or T to toggle the orientation of the text.

• To place a text profile along an arc or a curve, set the Point On Element option on the
Relationships tab on the IntelliSketch dialog box.

• To change existing text—Select the text, click the Text Step group button on the
command bar, and make your changes in the Text dialog box. To learn how, see the
help topic, Edit a Text Profile.

• To reposition the text or change the text anchor point—Select the text, click the
Location Step group button on the command bar, and follow the prompts. To learn
how, see the help topic, Edit a Text Profile.

3-104 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

PMI text size and color


Setting PMI text size

There are several ways to change the text size of PMI dimensions and annotations.
• Change all PMI elements and associated graphics (lines, leaders, and arrows) at once, using
either of the following methods:
o Automatically scale elements. When you use the active model style to determine text size,
PMI elements scale automatically as the view is zoomed in and out. This sometimes results
in PMI being too large or too small relative to the feature or component.

o Change element size interactively. You can use the Increase PMI Font and Decrease
PMI Font buttons to change the size of PMI elements based on pixel size. This has the
advantage of letting you fine-tune the size interactively.

• Change the size of new elements by editing the style. You can set a default text size for all new
PMI elements on the Text page of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box. You can access this

dialog box using the Styles command .

• Change the size of individual PMI elements. You can override the default text size for individually
selected elements using the Properties command.

You can specify the break line length and the gap between the break line and the PMI text on the
Lines and Coordinates tab in the dimension style and in the dimension properties.
To learn how to set and change PMI text size, see the Help topic, Change PMI text size.

Setting global PMI color

PMI dimension color is an at-a-glance indicator as to whether a dimension is locked or unlocked.


You can change the global color setting for PMI dimensions. This also changes the color of PMI
annotations.
You can change global PMI color settings on the Colors page of the Solid Edge Options dialog box.
• The default color of unlocked PMI dimensions is blue. It is the same as that set for all sketch
elements. You can choose another color for them from the Sketch list.

• The default color of locked PMI dimensions is red. It is the same as that set for handle elements.
You can choose another color for them from the Handle list.

You cannot change the color of individual PMI elements.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-105


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Text command
Use the Text command to place a text box or a text string on a drawing in a Draft document, a
Part sketch or a Sheet Metal sketch.

Text box editing handles

If you click and drag to draw the text box initially, then the box is defined as a fixed-width text box. You
can adjust the text box size interactively using the handles displayed when you select the text box.

If you click and type to begin entering content, then the text box is defined as Fit width to contents.
This means that the text box changes size as the content changes. Sizing handles are not displayed
on the text box when you select it. To make it easier to read and format the text as you create it, you
may want to switch to one of the following options, which you can select from the Text Control list
on the Text command bar:
• Fixed—Adjust Aspect Ratio

• Fixed—Wrap Text.

Text formatting options

When typing or editing text, you can use the Stack dialog box and the AutoStack dialog box to
format fractions, superscript, and subscript text.
Some text formatting options are available only when the cursor is inside the text box. For example,
you cannot stack text, apply bullets, or insert symbols until you click inside the text box.

You can apply other text formatting options, such as boldface, italics, and underline, when the text
box border is selected and the edit handles are displayed.

3-106 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

When showing a border around the text box, you can adjust the spacing between the border and
the text using the Indentation options on the Indents and Spacing tab of the Text Box Properties
dialog box.
You can create a list and choose a bullet style using the options on the Text command bar and the
Bullets and Numbering tab of the Text Box Properties dialog box.

Editing associative text

A text box may contain a combination of plain text and associative text that was inserted as property
text, reference text, and symbol codes. To locate a property text string for editing. you can use the
Show Property Text Code command on the text box shortcut menu. This displays all of the property
strings in the text box. You can edit a specific string by double-clicking it.
You can use the Format Values dialog box to apply formatting to the resolved value of a property text
string. For more information, see the help topic, Format property text values.

Locating empty text boxes

When a text box exists but does not contain text, the empty text box indicator is displayed
on the sheet. This makes it possible to locate and delete empty text boxes.
The empty text box symbol does not print.

Note
• You can control the display of the empty text box symbol using the option, Show empty
callouts and text boxes, on the General tab in the Solid Edge Options dialog box.

• In the Draft environment, the default symbol color is derived from the Disabled element
color on the Colors tab in the Solid Edge Options dialog box.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-107


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Place a text box or text string

1. Choose the Text command .

2. Do one of the following:


• To place a text box, click and drag to define the location and size of the text box. The text
box appears as an outlined box.

• To place a text string, click the location in the drawing where you want the text to start. The
cursor appears in the place where you can start typing text.

3. Type text in the text box or where the text string begins.

Tip
• You can make interactive adjustments to text size, color, alignment, rotation, and
other properties by selecting text and then applying the appropriate options on the
Text command bar.

• While creating and editing a text box or text string, you can click the Properties button
on the command bar to open the Text Box Properties dialog box.

• If you click and drag to draw the text box initially, then the box is defined as a fixed-width
text box. You can adjust the text box size interactively using the handles displayed
when you click the text box.

You also can change the text box size using the Fixed Width box and the Height box
on the Info page (Text Box Properties dialog box).

• If you click and type to begin entering content, then the text box is defined as Fit width
to contents. Sizing handles are not displayed on the text box when you select it. You
can change this using the Text Control option on the command bar.

• If you create a text box, but do not enter text in it, an empty text box indicator is displayed
on the sheet. This makes it possible to locate and delete text boxes without content.

• You can create superscript, subscript, fractions, bullet and numbered lists, and indented
paragraphs.

3-108 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

o Use the Stack dialog box to specify the content and formatting of superscript,
subscript, and fractions.
Use the AutoStack dialog box to apply fractional formatting to numbers and symbols
as you type.
To learn how, see the Help topic, Format a fraction, superscript, or subscript.

o Use the options on the Text command bar and on the Bullets and Numbers page
(Text Box Properties dialog box) to control the formatting of lists.
To learn how, see the help topic, Format a bullet or number list.

o You can copy and paste from another application, such as Microsoft Word. You also
can copy text from a Solid Edge text box to another application.

• You can control list numbering using the options on the Bullets and Numbering menu

on the Text command bar. These include:


o Continue Numbering

o Restart Numbering

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-109


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Sketches in PathFinder

• In PathFinder, there are two sketch collectors (Sketches and Used Sketches).

• Sketches are stored in a Sketches collector until they are consumed by body creation or deleted.

• The pencil symbol in front of a sketch denotes that its sketch plane is locked.

• Unconsumed sketches can be displayed or hidden with a check mark. All sketches or specific
sketches can be hidden or shown.

• Sketch elements used to create a feature are removed from the Sketches collector and placed in
the Used Sketches collector.

• Used sketches can be highlighted, deleted, renamed or restored.

3-110 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketches context menu in PathFinder

The sketches context menu includes options on how a sketch responds to creation of regions and
feature creation. These options are on a per sketch basis.

Show Annotations

Turns on or off the display of annotations, such as callouts and block labels, contained in the sketch.
In ordered, the annotations always display while in sketch mode.

Merge with Coplanar Sketches

• If a sketch exists on the locked sketch plane, then any new sketch geometry merges with the
existing sketch.

Enable Regions

• Locate regions as sketch geometry forms closed area(s).

Migrate Geometry and Dimensions

• Consume the sketch geometry used to create features and move into the geometry into the
Used Sketches collector.

• Create the PMI dimensions on the body as the sketch geometry is used to create features.

Note
When creating new synchronous sketches, you can set Enable Regions and Migrate
Geometry options in the Application menu→Settings→Options→General page. These
options are on by default.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-111


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Used Sketches context menu in PathFinder

Right-click on a used sketch to bring up the context menu. The Restore command restores a
consumed sketch to the Sketches collector. If a sketch plane exists that is the same as the used
sketch plane, the restored sketch will merge with the existing sketch.

3-112 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketch plane origin


reference planes

The origin of a reference plane is system defined. The horizontal direction and the origin are
positioned at the center of the reference plane. To change the reference origin, use the Reposition
Origin command to define the new origin and horizontal direction.

planar faces

The origin of a sketch on a planar face can be defined before locking the plane. The system
determines a horizontal direction and origin. To change the system defined origin, cycle through the
linear edges on the planar face. The edge displays green. Press N for next edge, B to go back to
previous edge, F to flip the Y direction and T to toggle which end of the edge is used. Once the
desired origin is displayed, click the lock to lock the sketch plane.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-113


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Reposition origin command


A sketch plane can only contain a single collection of sketch elements. However, there can be more
than one sketch area per sketch plane. In the example, there are two sketch areas (1 and 2). Sketch
area (1) horizontal/vertical directions are not the same as sketch area (2). The sketch plane origin
can be repositioned to redefine the horizontal/vertical directions for a particular sketch area.

3-114 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Zero Origin command

Use the Zero Origin command to automatically reset the origin as follows:
• In Draft, the drawing grid origin is reset to the drawing sheet (0,0) coordinate.

• In the synchronous environment, both the drawing grid and the sketch plane origin are reset to
the (0,0,0) coordinate and orientation at the center of the currently locked sketch plane.

Note
This command is available only when you have locked a sketch plane.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-115


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Reposition origin workflow


Workflow based on using a planar face for a sketch plane.

1. Lock the sketch plane.

2. In the Draw group, choose the Reposition Origin command.


The reposition origin handle displays at the sketch plane origin on the locked plane (1).

3. Click and drag the handle origin to a new vertex or edge.


This defines the new origin.

4. Click and drag the torus to position the horizontal direction. Select a keypoint or type in angle
to lock the direction.

3-116 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Sketch view

On the View tab→Views group, the Sketch View command orients the active view normal to
the horizontal/vertical direction of the locked sketch plane. You can also press Ctrl+H.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-117


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Sketch consumption and dimension migration


In synchronous part and sheet metal environments, you typically draw 2D sketch geometry for the
purpose of constructing features on a solid model. In the synchronous environment, when you use
sketch elements to construct a feature, the sketch elements are consumed and the 2D dimensions
you placed on the sketch migrate as driven dimensions to the appropriate edges on the solid body,
whenever possible.

Use the Migrate Geometry and Dimensions command command on the shortcut menu when
selecting a sketch in PathFinder to control whether sketch elements are consumed and dimensions
are migrated.

Automatic sketch consumption and dimension migration

By default, the Migrate Geometry and Dimensions command is set for a new document. The
sketch elements are automatically consumed and 2D dimensions are automatically migrated when
you use them to construct features. After you construct a feature, the 2D sketch geometry is moved
to the Used Sketches collector in PathFinder, and the 2D dimensions migrate as driven 3D PMI
model dimensions.
You can disable the automatic consumption of sketch elements and migration of 2D dimensions on
a sketch-by-sketch basis by clearing the Migrate Geometry and Dimensions command on the
shortcut menu when a sketch is selected in PathFinder.
All model dimensions, whether migrated from sketches or added to edges on the 3D model directly,
are PMI dimensions. PMI dimensions are displayed on PathFinder in the PMI collection, Dimensions
sub-collection.
To learn more about creating and using PMI, see the Help topic, PMI dimensions and annotations.

3-118 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Partially migrated sketches and dimensions

In many cases, only some of the sketch elements on a single sketch are used to construct a
feature. If this is the case, only the selected sketch elements and the associated 2D dimensions
are consumed and migrated.

During this process, dimensions and constraints may be connected to both body edges and to
remaining sketch geometry. If the sketch contains stacked dimensions, then some dimensions in the
stack may migrate individually. Other dimensions, such as coordinate dimensions, do not migrate
until all of the 2D geometry they are attached to has been used to construct a feature.
As you continue to construct features using the remaining sketch elements, sketch elements are
consumed and dimensions are migrated.

Dimension locking status after migration

2D dimensions are locked by default. When they migrate to the 3D model, they are unlocked.

Note
Dimension colors are determined by settings on the Colors page of the Options dialog box.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-119


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Working with combinable sketches


You can use the Merge Coplanar Sketches command on the shortcut menu to control whether a
sketch is combined with another coplanar sketch in a synchronous part.
When you set the Merge Coplanar Sketches option for a sketch, the following rules and conditions
apply:
• New sketch elements that are drawn coplanar to the sketch in free space are added to the
existing sketch. To create the new coplanar sketch elements as a separate sketch, you can select
the existing sketch and clear the Merge with Coplanar Sketches command before you draw
the new, coplanar sketch elements.

• The sketch will combine with another sketch if the two sketches become coplanar during a
move operation.

• In part and sheet metal documents, sketch regions are automatically enabled for a combinable
sketch. When sketch regions are enabled, you can use the Select tool to construct features
using the sketch. You can clear the Enable Sketch Regions command on the shortcut menu
to disable sketch regions.

• In part and sheet metal documents, sketch consumption is automatically enabled for the
combinable sketch. When sketch consumption is enabled, sketch elements are consumed when
you construct features from the sketch. You can clear the Migrate Geometry and Dimensions
command on the shortcut menu to disable sketch consumption.

Unique symbols are used in PathFinder to indicate whether a sketch is a combinable sketch,
noncombinable sketch, or the active sketch.
Legend

Noncombinable sketch

Combinable sketch
Active sketch (combinable active sketch shown)

3-120 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Non-combinable synchronous sketches

A non-combinable synchronous sketch makes it possible to draw multiple sketches that are coplanar.

For more information, see HELP topic Drawing sketches in assemblies.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-121


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Moving sketches
Sketches can be moved/copied in 2D or 3D. Sketches can be deleted or cut for pasting in 2D or 3D.
This section covers three methods available for manipulating sketch geometry.
• Manipulating sketch elements in 2D

• Moving and copying sketch elements in 3D

• Copy, cut and paste sketch elements

3-122 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Manipulating sketch elements in 2D

Planar sketch elements can be moved or copied with the 2D Move command found on the
Sketching tab, in the Draw group.
2D sketch element manipulation is confined to the selected sketch element's plane. If sketch
elements in the select set are on different sketch planes, an error box appears when choosing
any sketch manipulation command.
Error message: Selected sketch geometry must lie in the same plane.

Workflow for moving or copying a sketch

1. Select sketch elements to copy or move in the part window individually or with a select box. If the
sketch elements form a region, disable regions for the sketch before using the select box.

2. Choose the Move command .

3. Select point (on any of the selected sketch elements) to move or copy from. You can use
keypoints to define the move or copy from point.

4. Notice that there are options available in the Move (1) command bar.

If you want to move a copy, select the Copy option (2) . You can also enter the X (4), Y (5)
distances to move or copy to. You can also enter a step distance in the Step field (3).

5. Click a 'to' point to move or copy to. If you are moving, then the command ends once a to point is
clicked. The select set is still active. If you are copying, each click places a copy. A right-click
during a copy will end the command with the select set still active.

6. Press the Escape key to clear select set.

2D sketch manipulation commands

Two lists are available that contain 2D commands for manipulating sketch geometry.

Manipulation commands are move, rotate, mirror, scale and stretch.


These commands each have a set of options in command bar. Each command also can manipulate a
copy of the selected sketch elements.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-123


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Moving and copying sketch elements in 3D


Sketch elements can be moved/copied in 3D. The select set of sketch elements are not required to lie
all on the same plane. The 3D move requires the use of the graphic handle. See the Graphic handle
section in the “Moving and rotating faces” course to learn how to use the graphic handle.

The selected sketch elements can be:


• Moved or copied in the sketch plane

• Moved or copied to a parallel plane

• Rotated or copy rotated to another plane

Workflow for a synchronous 3D move or rotate of sketch elements


1. Select sketch geometry.

Selection methods
• Select entire sketches in PathFinder

• Select sketch elements individually in the part window.

• Select sketch elements in the part window with a select box

Note
If the sketch elements form a region, disable regions before using the select box.

Note
Select set can contain sketch elements on different planes.

2. If entire synchronous sketches are selected in PathFinder, the Move command starts.

Use the secondary axis or handle plane to move sketch elements in a plane.
To rotate, drag the handle origin to an edge that will be the axis of rotation. Then click the torus to
define the angle of rotation.

3-124 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Click the Copy option on the command bar to move a copy of the selected sketch elements.

3. If sketch elements are selected in the part window, on the Modify command bar, choose the
Move command from the drop list.

Use the graphic handle as described in the previous step to move or rotate the selected sketch
elements.

4. After sketches are manipulated and regions were disabled, you will need to remember to enable
regions in order to create features from the sketches.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-125


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Copy, cut, and paste sketch elements


Sketch elements can be manipulated using the Microsoft clipboard behavior.
• Ctrl+C copies the selected sketch elements to the clipboard.

• Ctrl+X deletes the selected sketch elements from the model and adds them to the clipboard.

• Ctrl+V pastes the selected sketch elements in the model.

Paste behavior

A paste operation places the sketch elements (clipboard) onto the locked sketch plane at the location
clicked. At this point, the paste elements are attached to the cursor and each click places another
copy paste elements on the locked plane.
If there is no locked sketch plane, the sketch elements are placed onto the plane highlighted under
the cursor at the location clicked. At this point, the paste elements are attached to the cursor and
each click places another copy of the paste elements on the locked plane.
To select another plane to paste to, end the paste operation with the Escape key. Ctrl+V starts the
paste operation again and then select the new plane.

3-126 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Projecting elements onto a sketch plane


Face edges, sketch elements and base reference plane edges can be projected onto a locked
sketch plane.

• The Project to Sketch command is located on the Sketching tab→ Draw group.

• The Project to Sketch command requires a locked sketch plane.

• Use the Project to Sketch command bar to refine the selection of elements to project and
to set the project options.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-127


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Project to sketch command

Use the Project to Sketch command to copy part edges or sketch elements onto the current
sketch plane. For example, you can select a part edge (1) to project onto the current sketch plane (2).
The projected edge (3) can then be used in the current sketch.

A relationship symbol indicates that an element is associatively linked to the parent element.
You can break the associative link on projected elements by deleting the link relationship symbols.
You can trim and modify projected elements, and incorporate associatively projected elements into
a sketch that contains newly created non-associative elements.
You can also add relationships or dimensions to associatively projected elements, but if the
relationship or dimension conflicts with the associative relationship to the parent element, a warning
message is displayed.

Note
When you use sketch elements to construct a feature in a part document, the sketch
elements are transferred to the Used Sketches collection in PathFinder. For projected
elements, the associative link between the parent element and the projected element is
discarded.

Activity: Sketching (Part 1)

Activity: Sketching (Part 1)


Activity covers plane locking, drawing sketch elements, placing dimensions, applying geometric
relationships, showing relationship handles, reposition sketch plane origin and controlling sketch
display.

3-128 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Open a part file


▸ Start Solid Edge.

▸ On the Application menu, click Open.

▸ In the Open File dialog box, set the Look in: field to the folder where the training files reside.

▸ Click sketch_A and then click Open.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-129


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Start the sketching process


▸ Choose the Line command.

▸ Define the sketch plane. Pause the cursor over the angled sketch plane. Press the N key until
the green edge highlights as shown. This defines the horizontal direction for the sketch plane.

Note
While the plane highlights, you can begin sketching and you lock to the plane. If you move
the cursor away from the plane before placing any geometry, you have to highlight the
plane again. You could also click the lock on the highlighted plane to lock the plane. If you
manually lock the plane, it remains locked until you unlock it.

3-130 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Draw sketch geometry


▸ Draw a slot shaped sketch consisting of two lines and two arcs. While the angled plane highlights,
click to place the first point of the line.

▸ For the second point of the line, make sure the horizontal indicator displays and then click.

▸ Place a tangent arc. Press the A key to enter the place arc command.
Position the intent zone as shown.

Place the arc end point vertical from arc start point.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-131


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

▸ Place the second line as shown. Make sure you get the tangent alignment symbol and the
vertical alignment from the first point of the start line.

▸ Place the second tangent arc. Press A and then end the arc at the endpoint of the first line.

3-132 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Regions formed
Notice the face changes to a blue color. This denotes the presence of regions. The sketch drawn on
the face creates two regions.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-133


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Place geometric relationships


Center the slot sketch on the face using geometric relationships.
▸ If the relationship handles are not displayed, on the Sketching tab→Relate group, choose the
Relationship Handles command.

The handles show that the lines are horizontal and the arcs are tangent connected to the
endpoints of the lines.

3-134 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Align the midpoint of one line to the midpoint of a face edge. In the Relate group, choose the
Horizontal/Vertical command. Click the midpoint of the line and then click the midpoint of
the face edge.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-135


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

3-136 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Align the center of the arc to the midpoint of a face edge. Using the horizontal/vertical command,
click the arc center and then the midpoint of the face edge. The slot is centered on the face.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-137


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Add dimensions
Dimension the slot radius and distance between centers.
▸ On the Sketching tab→Dimension group, choose the Smart Dimension command. Click on
one of the arcs and type 5 in the Dimension Value Edit dialog box.

▸ On the Sketching tab→Dimension group, choose the Distance Between command. Select the
center of each arc and type 30 in the edit box.

3-138 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Turn off sketch


▸ If the sketch plane was manually locked, in PathFinder, right-click the on the sketch. On the
short cut menu, choose Lock Sketch Plane.

▸ Click the check box to turn off the sketch display.

▸ Activity is complete. Exit the file and do not save.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-139


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Summary
In this activity you learned how to create a sketch on a part face. You learned how to apply
relationships and dimensions to a sketch.

Activity: Sketching (Part 2)

Activity: Sketching (Part 2)


Activity covers drawing a sketch on a reference plane, including edges from part faces, sketch
associativity to part model edges and the sketch view command.

3-140 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Open a part file


▸ Start Solid Edge.

▸ On the Application menu, click Open.

▸ In the Open File dialog box, set the Look in: field to the folder where the training files reside.

▸ Click sketch_B and then click Open.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-141


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Create a sketch plane


▸ On the Home tab→Planes group, choose the Coincident Plane command.

▸ Select the part face shown.

▸ Click the primary axis on the graphic move handle.

3-142 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ In the distance edit box, type 20.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-143


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Start the sketching process


▸ You will use edges of the part in the sketch. On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose the
Project to Sketch command. The command requires a locked plane.

▸ Lock the sketch plane. Pause over the sketch plane created earlier and then click the lock.
Dismiss the Project to Sketch Options dialog.

▸ Select the edges shown.

3-144 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Notice how these edges project to the locked sketch plane.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-145


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Observe sketch associativity


▸ Display PMI dimensions. In PathFinder, click the Dimensions check box.

▸ Click the 60° value on the dimension.

▸ Change the dimension (any value between 45° and 75°) and notice how the edge that was
projected to the sketch plane follows the angle of the face. Make sure the direction arrow on the
dimension matches the illustration. You can change the direction by clicking the arrow buttons in
the dynamic edit box.

3-146 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Set dimension to 60° and turn off the PMI dimension display.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-147


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Draw sketch geometry


Add and modify sketch geometry.
▸ Orient the sketch plane normal to the view. On the View tab→Views group, choose the Sketch
View command (or press Ctrl+H).

▸ Draw the sketch geometry as shown. Segment lengths and location are not important.

▸ Trim line segments. On the Sketching tab→Draw group, choose the Trim command .

3-148 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Click and drag the cursor over the line segments shown.

▸ Click and drag the cursor over the three line segments shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-149


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Edit display
▸ Turn off the Relationship Handles display.

▸ Switch to an isometric view. Type Ctrl+I.

▸ Close the file and do not save.

3-150 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Summary
In this activity you learned how to draw a sketch on a reference plane and how to include edges
from part faces. You observed sketch associativity to part model edges and used the Sketch View
command.

Activity: Sketching (Part 3)

Activity: Sketching (Part 3)


Activity covers drawing a sketch on a face, copying the sketch to another face, rotating and moving
the copied sketch.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-151


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Open a part file


▸ Start Solid Edge.

▸ On the Application menu, click Open.

▸ In the Open File dialog box, set the Look in: field to the folder where the training files reside.

▸ Click sketch_C and then click Open.

3-152 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Turn on the display of an existing sketch


▸ In PathFinder, click the check box for the sketch named slot.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-153


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Copy the sketch


▸ Select the sketch named slot in PathFinder.

▸ Press Ctrl+C to copy the selected sketch. The sketch is added to the clipboard.

3-154 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Paste the sketch


▸ Press Ctrl+V. The copied sketch attaches to the cursor. Pause the cursor over the face and then
click to place the sketch as shown. You will position the sketch next.

Note
You can press the N or B keys to control the copied sketch orientation. However, in this
activity, we will use the Rotate command to position the sketch.

▸ Press the Escape key to end the paste operation.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-155


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Rotate the copied sketch


▸ In PathFinder, right-click the copied sketch and choose Lock Sketch Plane from the short
cut menu.

▸ Choose the Sketch View command (or press Ctrl+H).

▸ On the Move command list, choose the Rotate command.

▸ On command bar, make sure the Copy option is not on.

▸ While holding down the Ctrl key, click the two lines and two arcs. The elements turn green
as they are selected.

▸ Select the arc center as center of rotation.

▸ Select the other arc center as the start point for rotation.

3-156 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ Click when the horizontal indicator appears. This rotates the sketch 90°.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-157


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Move the copied sketch


▸ Select the four elements again.

▸ Choose the Move command.

▸ For the move from point, select the center of an arc.

▸ For the to point, move the cursor over the midpoint of the top edge. The sketch will be centered
to this point. Do not click.

3-158 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

▸ While maintaining midpoint alignment display, move the cursor down to the location shown
and click.

▸ Press Ctrl+I.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-159


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

▸ Activity complete. Close the file and do not save.

3-160 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Summary
In this activity you drew a sketch on face and learned how to copy the sketch to another face. You
also learned how to rotate and move a sketch.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-161


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Sketch projects

3-162 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing A

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-163


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Drawing B

3-164 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing C

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-165


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Drawing D

3-166 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Drawing E

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-167


Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Sketching
Sketching

Course review
Answer the following questions:
1. What is the first step in creating a sketch?
Choose a command from the Draw group.

Select a sketch plane.

Switch to a sketch view.

Select the base coordinate system.

2. How do you lock a sketch plane?


Move cursor over a planar face or reference plane and select the lock icon.

Move cursor over a planar face or reference plane and press the F3 key.

Right-click on an existing sketch in PathFinder and choose Lock Sketch Plane.

None of the above.

All of the above.

3. How do you unlock a sketch plane?


Click the Lock icon in upper right corner of screen.

Press the F3 key.

Right-click on a locked sketch in PathFinder and choose Lock Sketch Plane.

None of the above.

All of the above.

4. What controls the horizontal/vertical direction of a sketch plane?

5. How do you know what sketch relationships exist?

6. How do you use the maintain relationships command?

7. What is a region?

8. Can an open sketch create a region?

9. What is the Used Sketches collector used for?

10. How do you reposition the sketch plane origin?

11. Explain what the Enable Regions command is used for.

12. Explain what the Merge with Coplanar Sketches command is used for.

3-168 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Sketching

Course summary
• Sketches that form closed areas are called regions.

• Use regions to define the cross section of a synchronous feature.

• Sketches do not drive the feature.

• Sketches move to the Used Sketch collector when used to create a feature.

• Lock to a sketch plane to create a sketch.

• Sketches relationships do not migrate to the feature. However faces that are coplanar, parallel,
perpendicular, etc. are detected as your design intent and are recognized when you make a
change to a face on a synchronous model. You can then use the Design Intent panel to control
which relationships to preserve and which to ignore during a move.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 3-169


Lesson 4: Base Features

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-1


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Base Features
Base features in sheet metal

A base feature in sheet metal is the first thickness plate placed in a sheet metal file. You can create
the base feature by placing a tab, which is a single thickness plate, or a contour flange, which can
consist of additional flanges and bends.

4-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Construct the base feature

You can construct a base feature with the Tab, Contour Flange, and Lofted Flange (ordered only)
commands. The Tab command constructs a flat feature of any shape using a closed profile.

Ordered

Synchronous
The Contour Flange command (ordered) constructs a feature comprised of one or more bends and
flats using an open profile.

Ordered
The Lofted Flange command (ordered) quickly constructs a flange using two open profiles on parallel
reference planes. Like the Contour Flange command, the Lofted Flange command automatically
adds bends using the bend radius property. You do not have to draw an arc at each bend location.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-3


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Ordered
In ordered, if you want to use a different bend radius value, you can do this by drawing arcs in
the profiles.

Ordered
The Bending Method tab (ordered) on the Lofted Flange dialog box creates incremental bends
for all bends in the flange.

Ordered
In ordered, you can set the number of bends. For the lofted flange to flatten, the arc angle must
match between the two cross sections.

4-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Tab command

Use the Tab command to construct a tab feature on a sheet metal part. You can use this
command to construct a base feature or add a feature to an existing sheet metal part.
In the synchronous environment, you can construct a tab with a single sketch region,

or with multiple sketch regions.

Creating tabs in the ordered environment

In the ordered environment, you can only have one profile per tab feature.
When selecting multiple regions, the regions must be contiguous and in the same plane. When
constructing a base feature in the ordered environment, the profile must be closed, and you must
also define the material direction and material thickness you want.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-5


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

For subsequent features in the ordered environment, the profile can be open or closed. When using
an open profile, you must define the side of the profile to which you want to add material.

Creating tabs in the synchronous environment

When constructing a base feature in the synchronous environment, the sketch region must be closed,
and you must also define the material direction and material thickness you want.

For subsequent features in the synchronous environment, the sketch can be open or closed. If the
sketch is open the edge of the tab must close the sketch to form a sketch region. Subsequent
features are automatically added when you select the extrude handle.

4-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Editing tabs

Once you create a tab, you cannot change the thickness or offset direction for the tab. You can use
the Material Table to change things such as global thickness, bend relief, and relief depth.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-7


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Construct a tab
You can construct a tab as a base feature or add a tab to an existing sheet metal part.

Construct a tab in the ordered environment

1. Choose Home tab→Sheet Metal group→Tab .

2. Define the profile plane.

3. Draw an open profile in any 2D shape or copy a profile into the profile window. The ends of an
open profile are extended to the edges of the part plane. An arc with open ends is extended
to form a circle.

Note
If you are using the Tab command to construct a base feature, the profile must be closed.

4. Choose Home tab→Close group→Close.

5. Finish the feature.

Construct a tab as a base feature in the synchronous environment

1. Position the cursor over a sketch region, then click to select it.
The extrude handle is displayed.

2. Click the Extrude handle.

4-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-9


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

3. Type a thickness value for the part.

4. Right-click to create the tab.

Tip
• You can choose the Material Table button on the command bar to display the Solid Edge
Material Table dialog box to make changes to things such as global thickness, bend
relief, and relief depth.

• You can click the direction indicator handle to change the offset direction.

Add a tab to an existing sheet metal part in the synchronous environment

1. Position the cursor over a sketch region, then click to select it.
The extrude handle displays.

4-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

2. Click the Extrude handle.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-11


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

The tab is automatically added.

4-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Cut command

Use the Cut command to create a cut through a defined portion of a part.

You can create a sheet metal cutout with an open profile

or a closed profile.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-13


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Face Normal cut types

Face Normal cut types include:

Thickness cut

This option creates a cutout that compensates for the material thickness of the part.

The Thickness cut option is useful when creating parts in which a shaft must pass through
aligned circular cutouts.

4-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Mid–plane cut

This option creates a cutout based on the mid-plane of the part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-15


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Nearest Face cut


This option creates a cutout based on the nearest face of the part.

4-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Cuts across bends

The Wrapped Cut option unfolds the bend to create a cut,

and then rebends when the cut is complete.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-17


Base Features

Activity: Using regions to create tabs and cuts

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to create various tabs in sheet metal and how to use regions to
make cuts. In this activity you will:
• Create a tab base feature from a sketch.

• Add additional tabs to the base feature.

• Create flanges.

• Explore the different options available when cutting a sheet metal part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-19


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open tab_cut_activity.psm.

Note
In this activity, the material thickness has been set to 2.0 mm and the bend
radius has been set to 1.0 mm.

Step 3: On the Application menu, click Save As→ Save As .

Step 4: On the Save As dialog box, in the File box, save the part to a new name or location so
that other users can complete this activity.

4-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Use the sketch to create the base feature


Step 1: Use the region shown to create the base feature from the sketch geometry. Select the
handle pointing up.

Step 2: Click to place the base feature, a tab, above the sketch as shown. Press Enter to accept
the material thickness of 2.00 mm.

Step 3: To place the next tab, select the region shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-21


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Step 4: Select the handle pointing up as shown. Since the material thickness is defined, the tab
will be placed when the handle is selected.

The base feature appears as shown.

4-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Create the flanges


Step 1: Select the edges as shown and click the flange command.

Step 2: Pull the flange down a distance of 40.00 mm.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-23


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Creating a cut
Step 1: Lock the sketch plane to the top face and place a rectangle approximately as the one
shown below.

Step 2: Select the two regions shown. Notice the Cut command is selected. Ensure the other
options on the command bar match the illustration and click the downward pointing
handle as shown.

Step 3: Click the endpoint on the edge shown to create the cut.

4-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Creating a wrapped cut


The wrapped cut command temporarily flattens the bend to place the cut.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-25


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Step 1: Create an approximate sketch as shown below. Do not extend the sketch more than
30.00 mm from the edge of the flange.

Step 2: Select the two regions shown and click the Wrapped Cut option as shown.

Step 3: Select the downward pointing handle. The part is unfolded showing a preview of the
wrapped cut. Right-click to accept.

4-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Moving thickness faces

Step 1: Click the Application button → Open→ Browse → tab_move_activity.psm.

Step 2: Select the primary axis of the thickness face shown. The Extend/Trim option is the
default.

Step 3: Click the primary axis and move it toward the bend. Enter a distance of 5.00 mm.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-27


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Observe the behavior. The length of the thickness face changes and the orientation of
the adjacent faces remains constant. The result is as shown below.

Step 4: Select the primary axis and the Tip option as shown.

Step 5: Enter 11.44 mm for the distance to move the thickness face.

4-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Observe the behavior. The length of the thickness face is constant and the orientation of
the adjacent faces changes. The result is as shown below.

Step 6: Select the primary axis and the Lift option as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-29


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Step 7: Enter a value of 10.00 mm.

Observe the behavior. The length of the thickness face is constant and the orientation
of the adjacent faces are constant. The tab extends perpendicular to the thickness
face. The result is as shown below.

4-30 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

This completes the activity. Close the sheet metal document without saving.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-31


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Activity summary
In this activity you created a sheet metal base feature using a tab, and added additional material
creating a tab from a sketch. Regions were used to create a cut and a wrapped cut. You learned the
different options for moving a thickness face.

4-32 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Base Features

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. Name two commands which can generate a base feature in a sheet metal document.

2. Are open cutouts valid in a sheet metal document?

3. What is a wrapped cut in sheet metal?

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 4-33


Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BaseBase Features
Features

Lesson summary
In this lesson you created a sheet metal base feature using a tab, and added additional material
creating a tab from a sketch. Regions were used to create a cut and a wrapped cut. You learned the
different options for moving a thickness face.

4-34 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Lesson 5: Contour Flange

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-1


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Contour Flange
Contour Flange

A contour flange can be used to create a base feature from a sketch, or it can be used to quickly
construct flange geometry along existing thickness edges of a sheet metal part. Parameters for
mitering corners around bends can be set.

5-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Contour Flange command

Use the Contour flange command to construct a contour flange by extruding a profile that
represents the edge of the contour flange.

Creating a contour flange in the context of an assembly

When in place activated into a synchronous sheet metal document, a contour flange can be created
from a chain of edges fro adjacent parts. The contour flange must be the first feature in the sheet
metal document.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-3


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Examples: Defining Reference Plane Orientation to Construct a Contour Flange


When constructing a contour flange, you must define the orientation of the profile plane relative to an
existing edge on the part. Doing this defines both the reference plane orientation and the path along
which the contour flange will be constructed.
For example, suppose you wanted to construct a contour flange as shown in the figure.

You could do this by selecting the endpoint of the edge shown to locate the new reference plane, and
then clicking the face shown on the right side of the figure to define the base of the reference plane.

You could then click near the end shown to define the x axis orientation.

5-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Activity: Constructing a base feature using contour flange

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how a contour flange can be used to create a base feature. In this activity
you will accomplish the following:
• Create a new sheet metal part.

• Create the material to be used for the part.

• Modify the thickness of the material.

• Create a sketch that will be the basis for the contour flange.

• Examine the PathFinder and understand how a contour flange is defined.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-5


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Open contour_actvity_1.psm.

Step 2: On the Application menu, click Save As→Save As.

Step 3: On the Save As dialog box, in the File box, save the part to a new name or location so
that other users can complete this activity.

5-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Create a base feature using the Contour Flange command


Step 1: Click the Home tab→Sheet Metal group→Contour Flange command.

Step 2: Select the sketch shown, then click the flange handle.

Step 3: Click the symmetric extent option.

Step 4: Use the tab key to change focus between the material thickness field and the extent
field. Set the material thickness to be 3.25 mm and the extent to be 120.00 mm, and
then press the enter key to complete the contour flange.

The results are shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-7


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Note
The base feature can be created from a contour flange. Tangent curves in
sketches are used to create bends.

Step 5: Observe PathFinder by moving the cursor over the features.

Note
The tab is created from the element chosen. Connected lines and tangent
curves create flanges.

Step 6: Save and close the sheet metal document.

5-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Create a contour flange


Step 1: Open contour_actvity_2.psm.

Step 2: Lock the sketch plane to the plane shown.

Step 3: Create the sketch shown. All segments are 20.00 mm.

Step 4: Select the Contour Flange command.

Step 5: Select the handle shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-9


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Step 6: Continue by selecting the adjacent edge shown.

Step 7: Continue by selecting the adjacent edge shown.

5-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

The preview is shown.

Step 8: Right-click to complete the contour flange.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-11


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Step 9: Observe PathFinder by moving the cursor over the features.

Note
The contour flange is a single feature. The corner conditions can be edited.

Step 10: In PathFinder, right-click the contour flange feature, and then click separate. Observe
the results.

5-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Note
The flange numbers in PathFinder may not match the numbers in the image
above. This is not a problem.

Notice that the contour flange feature was replaced by individual flanges. As a result,
there is no associativity between the flanges, but you can edit the individual flanges
independently of one another.

Step 11: Save and close the sheet metal document.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-13


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Contour flange options


Step 1: Open contour_actvity_3.psm.

Step 2: Select the Contour Flange command.

Note
In the following steps you will change the options for end conditions on the
contour flange and view the end conditions in the preview without accepting
until the last step.

Step 3: Begin the contour flange shown using the default parameters.

Step 4: Click the Options button.

Step 5: On the Miters and Corners tab, set the Miter option for the Start End and Finish End.
5-14 Solid Edge
Setsheet
each metal design
angle –30oguide
tostudent , then
click OK. Observe the results. mt01419-s-1050
Contour Flange

Create a partial contour flange


▸ Select the Contour Flange command.

▸ Select the sketch as shown.

▸ Click the Partial Contour Flange option.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-15


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

▸ Position the cursor approximately as shown, then click.

▸ The result is shown.

Note
Partial flanges can be further positioned by moving thickness faces or with dimensions.

▸ This completes the activity.

5-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Activity summary
In this activity you set the material thickness and extent to create a base feature using a contour
flange. The components of the contour flange were examined and manipulated. Options for the
construction of end conditions were explored, and a partial contour flange was placed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-17


Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Contour
Contour Flange
Flange

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. How can you make a base feature using the contour flange command?

2. Can a part edge be used to define the extent of a contour flange and if so, can an adjacent
edge be used to continue the extent?

3. What does the miter option do when used in the creation of a contour flange?

5-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Contour Flange

Lesson summary
In this lesson you set the material thickness and extent to create a base feature using a contour
flange. The components of the contour flange were examined and manipulated. Options for the
construction of end conditions were explored, and a partial contour flange was placed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 5-19


Lesson 6: Flanges, corners and bend relief

Flanges, corners and bend relief

You create flanges using flange handles. As you create them, you can control end conditions such as
bend relief and corner conditions. You can insert bends across layer faces.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-1


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Creating flanges
Creating flanges

When you select a planar thickness face on a sheet metal model, the flange start handle is displayed.

The flange start handle is also displayed without the 2D steering wheel when you click the Flange
command on command bar when a planar thickness face is selected.

6-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Flange command
Use the Flange command to construct a flange by extruding material that represents the face of
the flange.

Flanges in the synchronous environment

In the synchronous environment, you can construct a flange by selecting a linear thickness edge to
display the flange start handle,
clicking the flange start handle,
specifying a flange distance,
and clicking to place the flange.
When you click, a 90° flange is drawn automatically. However, when specifying the distance for the
flange, you can also specify an angle.

Note
Use the Tab button to switch between the distance and angular value controls.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-3


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Flanges in the ordered environment

In the ordered environment, you construct a flange by selecting a linear thickness edge, and then
reposition the cursor to define the flange direction and length.

6-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Corner Relief
Corner Relief

Specifies that you want to apply corner relief to flanges that are adjacent to the flange you are
constructing. When you set this option, you can also specify how you want the corner relief applied.
Bend Only
Specifies that corner relief is only applied to the bend portion of the adjacent flanges.
Bend and Face
Specifies that corner relief is applied to both the bend and face portions of the adjacent flanges.
Bend and Face Chain
Specifies that corner relief is applied to the entire chain of bends and faces of the adjacent flanges.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-5


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Bend command
Use the Bend command to insert a bend across a planar face. You can use the command to
add a bend in the middle of a part. The bend profile must be a single linear element. You cannot
insert a bend across an existing flange.

6-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Insert a bend
In the ordered environment, you can insert a bend with the Bend command.
In the synchronous environment, you can insert a bend with the Select tool or insert a bend with the
Bend command. Both workflows are explained in this topic.

Insert a bend in the ordered environment


1. Choose Home tab→Sheet Metal group→Bends list→Bend.

2. Define the profile plane.

3. Draw a profile. The profile, which must be a single linear element, represents the approximate
location of the bend.

4. Choose Home tab→Close group→Close.

5. Define the bend location with respect to the profile.

6. Define which side of the part will move.

7. Define the bend direction.

8. Finish the feature.

Tip
• You can automatically flatten the bend by setting the Flatten Bend option on the Bend
Options dialog box.

Insert a bend in the synchronous environment with the Select tool

1. Choose Home tab→Select group→Select .

2. Select the sketch element to create the bend.

3. Choose Home tab→Sheet Metal group→Bends list→Bend .

4. Click the side of the sketch to move.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-7


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

5. (Optional) Click to the direction arrow to change the direction of the bend.

6. (Optional) Type a value to change the bend angle.

7. Click to create the bend.

Insert a bend in the synchronous environment with the Bend command

1. Choose Home tab→Sheet Metal group→Bends list→Bend .

2. Select the sketch element to create the bend.

6-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

3. Click the side of the sketch to move.

4. (Optional) Click to the direction arrow to change the direction of the bend.

5. (Optional) Type a value to change the bend angle.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-9


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

6. Click to create the bend.

6-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Close 2-Bend Corner command


Use the Close 2-Bend Corner command to close the corner where two flanges meet and creates
the smallest gap permissible without joining the corner. Flange edges can equally meet, overlap,
totally intersect, or intersect with circular corner relief.

You can specify whether you want to close (A) or overlap (B) the corners.

You cannot directly move of rotate a bend corner. However, you can move or rotate the bend corner
by repositioning the adjacent flanges that form the corner. If a plate that contributes to the closed
corner is deleted, the bend faces created by the closed corner are deleted and the closed corner
definition is removed from the model.
You can select a closed corner for deletion, either in PathFinder or in the graphics window. When
you delete a closed corner, the corner definition is removed from the model and bends return to
the default bend state.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-11


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Activity: Flange and corner conditions


Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates control flange geometry and end contditions within a sheet metal part. In
this activity you will:
• Place flanges.

• Place partial flanges.

• Define and edit bend relief for bends.

• Defining corner conditions.

• Inserting a bend across a layer face.

• Rotating faces.

6-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open flange_activity.psm.

Note
This sheet metal part has a material thickness of 1.50 mm and a bend radius
of 1.00 mm.

Step 3: On the Application menu, click Save As→Save As.

Step 4: On the Save As dialog box, in the File box, save the part to a new name or location so
that other users can complete this activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-13


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Flange creation options


Step 1: Select the face shown and click the flange start handle.

Step 2: Create a flange with the default parameters that has the length of 40.00 mm.

Step 3: Create the flange shown below with a length of 10.00 mm.

6-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Note
The following steps will demonstrate the different options for corner relief.

Step 4: Select the face shown and click the flange handle. Click flange options and ensure
the Corner Relief is set to Bend Only.

Step 5: Pull the flange to the end of the bottom of the flange just created. Observe the corner
relief.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-15


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Step 6: Click the Undo command to remove the flange you just created.

Step 7: Select the face shown and click the flange handle. Click the Options button and set the
Corner Relief to Bend and Face.

Step 8: Pull the flange to the same distance as in the previous step. Observe the corner relief.

6-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Step 9: Click the Undo command to remove the flange you just created.

Step 10: Select the face shown and click the flange handle. Click the Options button and set the
Corner Relief to Bend and Face Chain.

Step 11: Pull the flange to the same distance as in the previous step. Observe the corner relief.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-17


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Step 12: Close the file without saving.

6-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Partial flanges
Step 1: Open relief_activity.psm.

Note
This sheet metal part has a material thickness of 1.50 mm and a bend radius
of 1.00 mm.

Step 2: Select the face shown and select the flange start handle.

Step 3: Click the Partial Flange option and create a flange with a length of 30.00 mm.

Note
Partial flanges are created with a width equal to 1/3 of the thickness face chosen,
and the selection point is defines the edge of the partial flange. The flange can
be modified to the desired width using dimensions to control the width.

Step 4: Click the Smart Dimension command.

Step 5: Place a dimension on the bottom edge of the flange just created. Change the width of the
flange to 15.00 mm by editing the dimension.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-19


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Step 6: Select the face shown.

Step 7: The origin of the start point will be changed by moving the steering wheel to the end of
the thickness face. Move the steering wheel to the position shown, and select the flange
command from the command bar.

6-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Step 8: Click the partial flange option and create a flange with a length of 30.00 mm.

Note
The origin of this flange partial flange is at the end of the thickness face and is
1/3 the length of the thickness face.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-21


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Bend relief
Note
The default bend relief can be overridden during placement, or after placement when
editing a bend.

Step 1: Select the bend shown, then click the edit feature handle.

Step 2: Click the Bend Options button.

6-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Step 3: Select the Override Global Value next to the Depth field and change the depth to 3.00
mm. Repeat the step to change the width to 2.00 mm.

Step 4: Experiment with different lengths, widths, and types of bend relief before dismissing the
bend options dialog box and observe the results.

Step 5: Close the sheet metal document without saving.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-23


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Corners
Step 1: Open corner_activity.psm.

Note
This sheet metal part has a material thickness of 1.50 mm and a bend radius
of 1.00 mm.

Step 2: Select the region shown and create a tab by pulling the handle up.

Step 3: Select all thickness faces and then click the flange start handle.

Step 4: Create flanges with the length of 20.00 mm as shown.

6-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

When more than one thickness edge is used to create flanges, observe the following:

• Shorter sides are bent first.

• Relief cuts, when required are made to the longer sides.

Note
When 3 or more thickness faces of the same length are encountered: Thickness
faces are sorted according to length and parallelism. Parallel faces are bent first.

Step 5: Click the 2–Bend Corner command.

Step 6: Select the two bends shown below.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-25


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Note
The command closes the corner upon selection of the two bends.

Step 7: If a warning message box displays a message indicating an invalid gap value, dismiss
the message box.

Step 8: Change the gap value to 0.30 mm and the overlap ratio to 0.75. Observe the results.

Step 9: Click the Flip option and observe the results.

Step 10: Click the Closed Corner option. Observe the how the corner closes.

Step 11: Change the Corner Treatment to Closed, and set the gap value to 0.30 mm. Observe
the change.

Step 12: Change the Corner Treatment to Circular Cutout, and set the gap value to 0.40 mm.
Set the diameter to 1.50 mm. Observe the change.

Step 13: Close the sheet metal document without saving.

6-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Inserting a bend
Step 1: Open bend_activity.psm.

Step 2: Select the region shown and create a cutout.

Step 3: Sketch a line as shown across the tab.

Step 4: Click the Bend command.

Step 5: Select the line as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-27


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Step 6: Select the Material Outside option.

Step 7: Select the side shown. Notice the extent of the bend traverses the length of the layer face.

6-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Step 8: Click the Bend Options button.

Step 9: Deselect Extend Profile and click OK.

Step 10: Right-click to complete the bend and add the flange. The results are shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-29


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Editing a bend
Step 1: Click the Select tool and select the bend. Click the edit handle as shown.

Step 2: Click the Options button and set the relief to be round with a width of 5.00 mm and a
depth of 5.00 mm.

Note
The relief could have been set during the creation of the bend in the previous
step. The purpose of changing the relief at this point is to demonstrate the
ability to edit a previously placed feature.

Step 3: Sketch a line as shown across the tab.

6-30 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Step 4: Click the Bend command.

Step 5: Select the line as shown.

Step 6: Select the Material Inside option.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-31


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Step 7: Right-click to complete the bend.

Step 8: Rotate the view and examine the two bends just placed. The flat pattern is shown.

Note
The two bends placed used the length of existing material to create the flanges.
Compare this workflow to the jog command in another activity.

Note
Creating a flat pattern will be covered in another activity.

Step 9: Close the file without saving.

6-32 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Moving faces
Step 1: Open move_activity.psm.

Step 2: Select the face shown.

Step 3: Select the origin of the steering wheel and position the steering wheel as shown.

Step 4: Select the steering wheel torus and rotate the flange by an angle of 25o as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-33


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Note
The lower horizontal flange is shortened as the face is moved. The horizontal
flange can be made to made to maintain the 90o bend angle by adjusting Design
Intent panel relationships that are preserved and adding the components of the
flange to the selection.

Step 5: Click the 2–Bend corner command.

Step 6: Select the two bends shown.

The corner is closed.

6-34 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Step 7: Select the face shown.

Step 8: Click Advanced on the Design Intent dialog box and ensure that the Maintain
Thickness Chain option in the Advanced Design Intent panel is not activated.

Step 9: Select the steering wheel torus and rotate the flange by an angle of –35o as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-35


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Note
The closed corner remains closed and modifies both flanges associated with
the corner.

Step 10: Close the sheet metal document without saving.

6-36 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Activity summary
In this activity you placed flanges and partial flanges. You edited end and corner treatments for
bends. You used the closed the corners of adjacent thickness faces at the intersection of two bends.
Bends were placed on the layer face and flanges were created and edited from these bends.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-37


Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Flanges,
Flanges, corners
corners and bend
and bend reliefrelief

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What is the purpose of bend relief in a sheet metal part?

2. How do you insert a synchronous bend into a sheet metal part?

3. How can you use the steering wheel to change the angle of a bend?

4. Can change and customize the values of the bend formula?

5. List three types of corner relief and describe each type.

6-38 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Flanges, corners and bend relief

Lesson summary
In this lesson you placed flanges and partial flanges. You edited end and corner treatments for bends.
You used the closed the corners of adjacent thickness faces at the intersection of two bends. Bends
were placed on the layer face and flanges were created and edited from these bends.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 6-39


Lesson 7: Hem

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-1


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

Hem
Constructing a hem in a sheet metal part

A hem feature creates a rigid edge for a sheet metal part. Modeling hems can be as easy as selecting
the edges where you want to place them.

7-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Hem command

Use the Hem command to construct a hem, where the material folds back.
In the synchronous environment, you can construct a hem along a linear edge.

In the ordered environment, you can construct a hem along any edge on a sheet metal part. For
example, you can construct a hem along a liner edge

or, along the curved edge of a circular cutout.

Note
Bends created with the command are included in bend table.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-3


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

You can use the Hem Options dialog box to specify the type of hem to be created. The Hem Type
list contains several types of hems from which to choose. For example, you can define s-flange
(A), loop (B), and closed (C) hems.

You can use the Hem Options dialog box to specify the type of hem to be created. The Hem Type list
contains several types of hems from which to choose.

7-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Construct a hem

1. Choose Home tab→Sheet Metal group→Contour Flange list→Hem .

2. Select the edge(s) for the hem.

3. Click to complete the hem.

Tip
• You can use the Hem Options dialog box to specify the type of hem to be created,
along with bend radius, and flange length for the hem. The options that are available
depend on the type of hem being created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-5


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

Activity: Using the hem command in sheet metal design

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to create a hem on the edge of a sheet metal part. In this activity
you will:
• Create a simple hem on a single edge of a sheet metal part.

• Vary the options for creating hems.

• Control the extent and end treatments of hems placed along adjacent thickness faces.

7-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open → hem_activity_1.psm.

Step 3: On the Application menu, click Save As → Save As.

Step 4: On the Save As dialog box, in the File box, save the part to a new name or location so
that other users can complete this activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-7


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

Create a hem on a single edge

Step 1: Click the Hem command .

Step 2: Click the Hem Options button .

Step 3: Set the Hem Type to be Closed and Flange Length 1 to be 15.00 mm.

Step 4: Select the edge shown.

Step 5: Right-click to complete the hem shown.

Step 6: Click the Select tool and then click the hem feature in PathFinder. Click the edit handle to
change the settings on the hem.

7-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Step 7: Click the Hem Options button and set the Type to Open. Set Bend Radius 1 to 1.50
mm. Set Flange Length 1 to 6.00 mm and then click OK. The hem is modified as shown.

Step 8: Click the Hem Options button and set the Type to S-Flange. Keep the default values for
bend radii and flange lengths, then click OK. The hem is modified as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-9


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

Step 9: Click the Hem Options button and set the Type to Curl. Set Flange Length 1 to 11.25
mm and keep the existing values for the remaining lengths and radii, then click OK.
The hem is modified as shown.

Step 10: Click the Hem Options button and set the Type to Closed Loop. Keep the default
values for bend radii and flange lengths, then click OK. The hem is modified as shown.

Step 11: Close the file without saving.

7-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Create a hem on multiple adjacent edges


Step 1: Open hem_activity_2.psm.

Step 2: Click the Hem command .

Step 3: Click the Hem Options button .

Step 4: Set Hem Type to S-Flange.

Step 5: Check the Miter Hem option and ensure the Miter Angle is –45o.

Step 6: Select the edge shown.

Step 7: Select the edge set shown.

Note
Since the selection type is set to chain, the edge set is defined by the perimeter
of the part. If a single edge is desired, the selection type can be set to single
rather than chain.

Step 8:

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-11


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

Step 9: Right-click to accept the hem.

Step 10: Shown below is a flat pattern of the sheet metal part is shown below.

Note
Flat pattern creation is covered in another activity. This is for information
purposes only.

7-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Activity summary
In this activity you created a variety of hems in sheet metal parts. You learned how to set the
parameters to create the hems, and how to edit the values when needed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-13


Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Hem Hem

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. Using hem options, define the three types of hems that can be created.

2. What is the difference between using a positive value versus a negative value in defining a
hem mitre?

3. When creating a sheet metal hem feature, list at least three options needed to create the hem.

7-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Hem

Lesson summary
In this lesson you created a variety of hems in sheet metal parts. You learned how to set the
parameters to create the hems, and how to edit the values when needed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 7-15


Lesson 8: Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-1


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal


Preserving Design Intent relationships in sheet metal

When you use the steering wheel to modify a face on a synchronous model, the Design Intent
relationships control how the rest of the model responds.

8-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Using the Design Intent panel


The Design Intent panel opens when you make modifications to a synchronous model. The options
on the panel allow you to control how much of the design intent that was previously built into the
model is preserved or ignored as you make a move.

How to use the Design Intent panel

1. Select a face or feature on your synchronous model. Synchronous models use face relationships
to control the model behavior when moving faces, defining 3D relationships, or editing
dimensions. The Design Intent panel opens and displays a list of design intent relationships to
evaluate. All the checked relationship options are examined when you make a move. Uncheck
any relationship options you do not want to evaluate, or uncheck Design Intent to ignore
evaluating any design intent relationships. Any changes you make persist through the session or
until you restore the default settings Using the Advanced Design Intent panel.

2. Continue to select the faces or features to identify the extent of the selection set.

3. Move the selection set. The Design Intent panel updates to display the discovered relationships.
All discovered relationships are highlighted in the model and move in relation to the selection set.

4. If more faces and features are discovered than you want, uncheck one or more of the relationship
options to reduce or change the number of affected faces. Select the combination that preserves
the design intent you desire. Press Enter to complete the move. Press Escape to cancel the
move.

If you require more control, use the Advanced ... option or press V on the keyboard to open the
Advanced Design Intent panel after you make the initial move.
Use the options on the Advanced Design Intent panel to select how much design intent you want
to preserve. The Advanced Design Intent panel and the features of the Solution Manager allow
more control over the design intent that you want to preserve as a result of a move. See Using the
Advanced Design Intent panel and Solution Manager Overview for more information.
The Design Intent panel opens for the following types of synchronous modeling modifications:
• When you move or rotate model faces or features in a synchronous part, sheet metal, or
assembly environments
• When you edit the value of a 3D dimension in a synchronous part
• When you edit the dimensional value of a locked 3D dimension using the Variable Table (Tools
tab→Variables group→Variables).

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-3


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Design Intent Panel Options

(1) Help
Opens this help file.
(2) Play video
Plays a short video on how Design Intent works.
(3) Pin panel
Pins the Design Intent panel in place. Initially the panel appears adjacent to the face or feature
clicked on the model. Once pinned, you can drag it where you want. When the pin is in this
position, the Design Intent panel consistently displays in the current location until you move it
or unpin it. An unpinned panel opens adjacent to the face or feature you click on the model.
(4) Advanced...
Opens the Advanced Design Intent panel. The Advanced Design Intent panel is used to
further control which Design Intent relationships you want to preserve or ignore. See Using the
Advanced Design Intent panel for more information.
(5) Hide details/Show details
Toggle between showing the full Design Intent panel or a minimized the panel that takes up less
space in your graphics window. This setting is persistent.
(6) Design Intent relationship options
Check the relationship options that you want to evaluate when a face or feature is moved. The
relationship options that are displayed vary by environment and the content of the model. For
example, the options in a sheet metal document include the Thickness Chain relationship by
default while the Relationships option is only displayed for parts that have defined persistent
relationships. In the assembly environment the Dimensions and Relationships options are
always displayed. Uncheck any items in the list that you do not want to be evaluated during the
move operation. You can move the cursor over these items to display the shortcut key used to
activate or deactivate them.

8-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

(7) Design Intent


Suppress evaluating any design intent relationships for the current move. The Dimensions
(locked dimensions) or Relationships (persistent relationships) are independently controlled.
The shortcut key is U.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-5


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Thickness chain
Thickness chain on a sheet metal part

A contiguous series of thickness faces (A) and bend end caps (B) in a sheet metal part.

8-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Using the Thickness Chain Design Intent option in sheet metal


modeling
The Design Intent panel and the Advanced Design Intent panel work the same in synchronous
sheet metal modeling as they do in synchronous part modeling. See Using the Design Intent panel
for more information.
For synchronous sheet metal parts, a Thickness Chain option appears in the list of design intent
relationships in the Design Intent panel and as an icon in the Advanced Design Intent panel.
The Thickness Chain maintains thickness faces connected by bends during a move operation.
When the Thickness Chain option is set and a thickness face is moved, the other connected faces
also move.

When the Thickness Chain option is not set, only the selected thickness face or faces move.

The Thickness Chain option ignores the Coplanar relationships within the thickness chain so the
thickness chain does not have to be coplanar to work.

Relationships are not detected between members of the same thickness chain, but are detected
between members of separate chains. So even though the Coplanar relationship is not detected
within one thickness chain, it is detected from one thickness chain to another.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-7


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

In the following example, Symmetry and Thickness Chain are disabled. When the selected face is
moved, the faces in red move also because they are coplanar and are part of a separate thickness
chain. Since Thickness Chain is disabled and the Coplanar rule is not detected within the thickness
chain containing the face selected to move, the blue face does not move.

The Keep Orthogonal to Base option may need to be set to move or rotate a face that will cause a
plate or thickness face to tip at an angle not orthogonal to the base reference plane.

8-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Copying, pasting, and attaching sheet metal features


Many times, you may find it useful to copy and paste an existing sheet metal feature rather than
create a new feature.

Once you have pasted the feature, you can use the Attach command to attach the feature to the face.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-9


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Copying sheet metal features

You can copy for pasting or attaching:


• flanges, along with the associated bend

• procedural features

• sketches

You cannot copy for pasting or attaching:


• bends

• complex contour flanges

• hems

• dimensions

• closed corners

• gussets, unless the associated bend and flange are selected

When you copy a sheet metal element, the following is copied to the clipboard:
• steering wheel location

• attributes

• profile

• feature origin for procedural features

You can copy and paste multiple elements at once.

Copying elements in feature libraries

You can add eligible sheet metal features to a feature library for copy and paste. You can copy
sketches between Synchronous Sheet Metal and Synchronous Part when creating feature libraries.
However, the feature library cannot be a mixture of files. In other words, you cannot drag a
Synchronous Part document from a feature library into a Synchronous Sheet Metal document.

8-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Pasting and attaching sheet metal features

The Paste command pastes features from the clipboard to the sheet metal model. When you paste
a feature to a model, it is not actively added to the solid model. Once pasted, you use the Attach
command to add the faces to the solid model.
When sheet metal elements are added to the model, they are added to PathFinder as distinct face
sets. For example, each procedural feature has its own face set. Bend and flange combinations
are added together as a flange entry.
As previously stated, you can use the Attach command to add faces that have been pasted from the
clipboard to the solid model.
When using the Attach command you can use the extend to next and capping behavior to join the
construction to the body for thickness faces.

You cannot extend or trim manufactured features with the Attach command.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-11


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Copying, pasting, and attaching flanges

When you select a face of a flange to copy, all other faces in the flange are selected for copy.

Once you copy the flange and then select the Paste command, a glass image of the flange attaches
to the steering wheel.

8-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

After you paste the flange, it appears as a detached flange.

You can locate and lock to a plane and then use the steering wheel to adjust the position of the
detached flange.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-13


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Once the position of the flange is valid so that it can be attached, you can use the Attach command to
attach the flange to the main body of the model.

When the flange is attached to the main body, all other required faces are automatically created.

8-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Note
When pasting a flange, the open side of the bend (A) must face and be tangent to the
target plate (B).

The flange bend can also be embedded into the boundary of the plate.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-15


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Activity: Using Design Intent relationships in sheet metal


Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to control behavior when modifying sheet metal parts. In this activity
you will:
• Explore how Design Intent relationships affect changes to sheet metal faces.

• Establish relationships to control behavior of faces.

• Mirror, copy, cut and paste sheet metal features.

8-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open design_intent_activity.psm.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-17


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Symmetry about the base reference planes


Note
In this activity, behavior of the Design Intent relationships can be observed by watching
the dynamic preview while pulling one of the handles. In many cases, just observing the
behavior without actually making the change is what will be accomplished. Pressing the
Esc key will exit a the command without making any modifications. If a flange is moved
erroneously, use the undo command to restore it's position.

Step 1: Select the face shown and click the primary axis.

Step 2: On the Design Intent dialog box, click Advanced.

Step 3: Click the Restore button on the Advanced Design Intentpanel.

Note
This resets the Design Intent relationship items to the default values.

Step 4: Drag the handle as shown and observe the behavior, then press the Esc key.

8-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Creating persistent rules


A permanent relationship between two faces will be created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-19


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Step 1: Select the two faces shown and click the flange start handle.

Step 2: Click the Restore button on the Advanced Design Intent panel.

Note
This resets the Design Intent relationships to the default values.

Step 3: Drag the flange start handle a distance of 40.00 mm as shown.

Step 4: Select the face shown.

8-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Thickness Chain
Thickness chain is a Design Intent relationship that is unique to sheet metal.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-21


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Step 1: Select the thickness face shown and select the move handle.

Step 2: Click the Restore button on the Advanced Design Intent panel.

Step 3: Drag the handle as shown and observe the behavior, then press the Esc key.

Observations:

• The Design Intent relationships affecting the behavior are thickness chain, maintain
coplanar faces and symmetry about the base reference planes.

Step 4: Select the thickness face shown and select the move handle.
8-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050
Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Activity summary
In this activity you explored the behavior of sheet metal geometry by creating relationships and
changing Design Intent relationships.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-23


Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: UsingUsing the Design
the Design IntentIntent
panelpanel in sheet
in sheet metalmetal

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. Define sheet metal thickness chain.

2. Describe how the maintain thickness chain option affects the movement of a face contained in
the thickness chain.

3. Describe how Design Intent relationships affect faces of the same thickness chain as opposed
to another thickness chain.

8-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Using the Design Intent panel in sheet metal

Lesson summary
In this lesson you explored the behavior of sheet metal geometry by creating relationships and
changing Design Intent relationships.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 8-25


Lesson 9: Jog

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-1


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Jog
Constructing a Jog in a sheet metal part

A jog constructs an offset face with a connecting flange and maintains the positions of any features
contained on the face, such as holes and deformation features.

9-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Jog command

Use the Jog command to construct two bends to add a jog to a planar face of a sheet metal part.
In the ordered environment, the profile for a jog feature must be a single linear element. In the
synchronous environment, the sketch element used to construct the jog must be a single line that is
coplanar with the face being bent. The jog can be minimal: for example, a slight offset or step to
provide clearance or rigidity to a part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-3


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Editing the bend radius


When you create a bend, the bend radius is defined from the default global parameters. Once a bend
is created, it can be edited by selecting the bend,

then selecting the bend radius handle,

then typing a new value in the dynamic edit control,

9-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

and then clicking to finalize editing the radius.

If you increase the bend radius, bend relief is applied to the model and the bend extends into the
flange.

If you decrease the bend radius, the tab and flange extend into the bend to decrease the bend radius.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-5


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Editing the bend radius in split bends

Depending on how split bends are created, the bend radius for split bends may be edited separately
or together. If the split bends are created when two flanges are created independently as partial
flanges, the bend radius can be edited separately.

If the split bends were originally a single bend in a flange, and then cut to make two separate flanges,

9-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

the bend radius is edited together.

If the flanges on both sides of the bend are bound by the model, the bend radius for each bend row
is edited together. For example, if you edit the radius for the top bend, the radius is updated for
the top bend in both flanges.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-7


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Activity: Using the jog and break corner command in sheet metal design

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to create a jog in a sheet metal tab, and place flanges and trim away
unwanted material from the part. In this activity you will:
• Create a tab based on reference geometry.

• Create the sketches needed by the jog command.

• Set the parameters for the jog.

• Modify the bend radius when and where appropriate.

• Use the break corner command to get rid of sharp corners.

9-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open jog_activity.psm.

Note
This sheet metal file was created in the context of an assembly. An
interpart-copy contains geometry from a part file that will be used to define the
extents of the sheet metal part being created. The geometry has rounded edges
with a 2.0 mm radius. Knowing this, the proper bend radius can be established.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-9


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Draw the sketch and create the base feature


Note
This sheet metal file was created in the context of an assembly and inter-part geometry
from a part file was imported into the file. This geometry will be used to define the extents
of the sheet metal that will cover the part. It is visible in PathFinder and the display of the
geometry can be toggled on or off there.

Step 1: Select the Project to Sketch command .

Step 2: Lock the sketch plane to the top most face on the part.

Step 3: If the Project to Sketch Options dialog box appears, click Cancel to dismiss it.

Step 4: Use the command to include the following geometry in the sketch:
• The outer edges around the base. Only the straight edges need to be included.

9-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Create a jog

Step 1: Click the Jog command and select the line shown.

Step 2: Select the direction arrow as shown.

Step 3: Select the Material Outside option on command bar.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-11


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Step 4: Select the Dimension to Die option on command bar.

Step 5: Drag the jog down by clicking on a keypoint on the lower face of the part.

9-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

The jog is created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-13


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Modifying the bend radius


Step 1: Observe the following about the jog just created:
• Press Ctrl+T to rotate the view to a top view. Observe that the holes are in the part
are still aligned with the holes in the sheet metal.

• Press Ctrl+F to rotate the view to a front view.

9-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

At (A) in the figure above, the sheet metal fits exactly over the 2.0 mm round on the
part because the bend radius is 2.0 mm. The material thickness is 1.0 mm. The outer
radius is the sum of these two values and is 3.0 mm. On the bottom bend, (B) the
sheet metal does not fit exactly because of this. In the next step the bend radius will
be modified so that the sheet metal part is correctly positioned at (B).

Step 2: Press Ctrl+J to rotate the view. Select the bend shown, then click the text. This will
allow edits to the bend radius for that bend.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-15


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Step 3: Change the Bend Radius to 1.0 mm.

Step 4: Press Ctrl+F to rotate the view to a front view. Observe the bend.

Step 5: Use the same steps to place a jog on the opposite side of the part and modify the bend
radius on the lower bend. The result is as shown below.

9-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Step 6: Place the last jog using the remaining line in the sketch. Modify the bend radius on the
lower bend. The result is as shown below.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-17


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Using the Cut command to trim unwanted edges


In this step the Cut command is used to trim away unwanted parts of the vertical flanges.

Step 1: Select the Project to Sketch command .

Step 2: Lock the sketch plane to the outer face of the vertical flange and include the following
geometry in the sketch:

Step 3: Click the Trim Corner command and trim the lines so that they intersect and form
a region.

Step 4: Select the region shown.

9-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Step 5: Selecting the region initiates the Cut command. Set the Face Normal Cut Types option
to Mid-Plane Cut and the Extent option to Through All.

Step 6: Click the left arrow.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-19


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

The flanges are trimmed.

Step 7: Right-click to finish the trim.

9-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Using the Cut command to trim unwanted edges


In this step the Break Corner command is used to round the sheet metal corners.

Note
The Break Corner command can be used to either round or chamfer a corner. In this
activity a 2.0 mm round will be placed on each sheet metal corner.

Step 1: Click the Break Corner command .

Step 2: On the command bar, set the Corner Type to Radius and the Selection Type to Face.

Step 3: Select the 5 faces shown and enter a radius of 2.0 mm.

The results are shown. This completes the activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-21


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

9-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Activity summary
In this activity you created a sheet metal base feature and used the Jog command to form the sheet
metal around and existing part. You modified the bend radius where needed and then used the
Cutout command and the Break Corner command to finish the model.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-23


Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Jog Jog

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What does the jog command do in a sheet metal document?

2. Explain the material side options when placing a jog?

9-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Jog

Lesson summary
In this lesson you created a sheet metal base feature and used the jog command to form the sheet
metal around and existing part. You modified the bend radius where needed and then used the cutout
command and the break corner command to finish the model.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 9-25


Lesson 10: Deformation features

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-1


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Deformation features
Deformation features in a sheet metal part

Deformation features model features on the thickness faces of sheet metal parts, such as louvers,
beads, dimples, drawn cutouts, and gussets, that can be manufactured by striking the stock with
a tool. The values you use to define deformation features as you create them are stored with
the features, and you can edit them later. Also the feature origin, or strike point, of the feature is
positioned on the face such that if the face is later rotated or a jog is added, the feature will remained
positioned. The feature can be relocated by modifying the position of the feature origin.
Deformation features consist of louvers, beads, dimples, drawn cutouts, and gussets.

10-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Adding sheet metal deformation features


You can model features in the Sheet Metal environment that are manufactured with metal deformation
techniques, such as deep drawing and coining. When parts are manufactured using deformation
techniques, material thinning typically occurs. In Solid Edge, this material thinning is ignored and
deformation features are constructed using the same material thickness specified for the model.

Adding deformation features across bends

In the ordered environment, you can add deformation features, such as beads, dimples, and drawn
cutouts across a bend created in version ST6 or later.

You can also create a louver that lies completely inside a bend region.

Note
Deformation features can only be created across a bend when the bend is in the unbent
state. Also, if there is a flat in the file then it needs to be deleted and recreated.

Adding deformation features across a bend: workflow

1. Unbend the bend or bends that the deformation feature will cross.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-3


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

2. Create the deformation feature.

3. Rebend the unbent portions of the model.

You can create deformation features across either the inside face (A) or the outside face (B)
of a bend.

10-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Note
If the deformation feature is a bead, it can be either parallel (A) or nonparallel (B).

The deformation feature can also lie completely inside the bend region.

For deformation features inside the face, the depth of the deformation feature crossing the bend
must be smaller than the associated bend radius. In cases where the deformation feature crosses
multiple bends, the depth of the bead must be smaller than the smallest bend radius in the group.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-5


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

For example, if a bead crosses a bend with a bend radius of 6 mm (A) and a bend with a bend

radius of 10 mm (B).
the bead depth must be less than 6 mm. In this case the bead depth is 5 mm.

For bends outside the face, the depth of the deformation can be greater than the smallest bend
radius in the group. In the following example, the smallest bend radius is 5 mm, but the depth of
the drawn cutout is 10 mm.

10-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

When creating a dimple or drawn cutout across a bend, the feature can be created with either a
closed profile,

or with an open profile.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-7


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Editing deformation features across and within bends

The Edit Definition, Edit Profile, and Dynamic Edit commands are available for deformation
features that extend across or lie within a bend. The workflow for editing deformation features
does not change for these type of deformation features.

Inserting bends across deformation features

In addition to creating a deformation feature across a bend, you can use the Bend command to
insert a bend across existing deformation features, For example, the following model consists
of three louvers created on a tab.

Using the Bend command, you can create a bend that crosses the louvers.

10-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

While you cannot insert a deformation feature across a bend created in a version prior to ST6,
you can insert a bend across a deformation feature created prior to ST9. For example, the model
consists of two dimples created on a tab in a version prior to ST9.

Using the Bend command in version ST9 or later, you can create a bend that crosses the dimples.

Note
When creating a bend across a deformation feature, the bend line must extend
completely across the feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-9


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Flattening deformation features

You can also flatten deformation features, such as dimples, on bends.

10-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Working with feature origins


You can use the feature origin handle to move or rotate manufactured features that contain a
feature origin. The feature origin provides a reference point that can be used to move a feature
without changing its shape.
The feature origin is used primarily in sheet metal models (.psm) for features such as dimples,
drawn cutouts, and louvers.

Note
A feature origin is also used for hole features in part and sheet metal documents. The
feature origin for a hole feature does not have XY fins.

You can dimension to a feature origin, and then edit the dimensional value to move the entire feature.

Note
When using Smart Dimension to dimension to a feature origin you cannot select the feature
origin first.

Show and Hide commands are available to display and hide the feature origin when you select a
feature that contains a feature origin. You can also display and hide all the features origins in a
document.
Shortcut menu commands are available to reposition the feature origin for a feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-11


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Activity: Working with deformation features in sheet metal

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to place and manipulate and edit deformation features and feature
origins within a sheet metal part. In this activity you will:
• Place deformation features such as louvers, beads, dimples, drawn cutouts, beads and gussets.

• Pattern a deformation feature.

• Show, hide and move the feature origin of a deformation feature.

• Edit the values of a deformation feature.

10-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open deformation_activity.psm.

Note
This sheet metal part was created with a material thickness of 3.50 mm and a
bend radius of 1.00 mm.

Step 3: On the Application menu, click Save As → Save As.

Step 4: On the Save As dialog box, in the File box, save the part to a new name or location so
that other users can complete this activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-13


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Place a louver on the front face

Step 1: Select the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Louver command .

Step 2: Click the Louver options button on the command bar.

Note
The louver depth cannot be greater than half the louver length. The louver
height cannot be greater than the material thickness.

Step 3: Enter the following values:


• Type: Formed-end louver

• Length: 25.00 mm

• Depth: 8:00 mm

• Height: 4.00 mm

• Turn on rounding and set the die radius to 0.88 mm.

Step 4: Click OK.

Step 5: Move the cursor over the front face and observe the behavior.

Note
The length of the louver is parallel with an edge the plane that the cursor is
positioned over. The N (next) and B (back) keys can be used to cycle through
the plane edges. The louver will orient itself to be parallel to the edge displayed.
When the desired orientation is achieved, the F3 key will lock the louver to that
plane and in the orientation chosen.

Step 6: Orient the louver as shown by entering N as needed. Once the orientation is established,
enter F3 to lock to the face and orientation.

10-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Note
Once the plane and orientation has been set can be positioned with a left
mouse click, or my using dimensions to precisely locate the louver. In the next
step, the louver will be located using dimensions.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-15


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Step 7: Move the cursor over the edge shown below and press the E key.

Note
To position using dimensions, entering the character E dimensions from the
endpoint of an edge and entering the character M dimensions from the midpoint
of an edge.

Step 8: Move the cursor over the edge shown below and enter M from the keyboard.

10-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Note
Notice the dimension originating from the end of the previous edge chosen.

Step 9: Without clicking the mouse, move the cursor to the approximate position shown below.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-17


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Step 10: For the horizontal dimension value enter 95.00 mm, and for the vertical dimension value
enter 24.00 mm as shown. Use the Tab key to toggle between fields, then press Enter.

10-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

The louver is placed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-19


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Feature Origin
The origin of a feature is called the feature origin, and is also referred to as the strike point for
manufacturing purposes and which can be shown and detailed in Solid Edge Draft. The feature origin
can be offset upon creation, or offset after placement. The feature origin can also be used to apply a
rotation angle to a rigid procedural feature such as a louver. In the following steps, the feature origin
of the louver just created will be moved and rotated.
Step 1: In PathFinder right-click the louver entry and select Show Feature Origin.

The feature origin appears.

10-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 2: Click the louver feature in PathFinder. When displayed, click the edit handle as shown.

Step 3: Click the Louver Options button. Change the Y value of the feature origin offset to
8.00 mm, then click OK.

The feature origin changes position.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-21


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Note
Notice that only the feature origin changed position. The louver is still located
in the same position.

10-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 4: Select the louver, then select the torus of the steering wheel.

Step 5: Rotate the louver 45o as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-23


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

The louver has been rotated about the feature origin. Right-click the louver in PathFinder
and hide the feature origin.

10-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Patterning the deformation feature


Step 1: Select the louver in PathFinder and then click the Home→Pattern→Rectangular

Pattern command .

Note
When selecting a reference plane for the pattern, press F3 to lock to the
appropriate plane.

Step 2: Set the pattern parameters as follows:


• Type: Fit

• X count: 6

• Y count: 3

• Vertical distance: 95.00 mm.

• Horizontal distance: 180.00 mm.

Step 3: Click the Accept button to finish creating the rectangular pattern.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-25


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Placing Beads

Beads are added to sheet metal parts as stiffeners.

Step 1: In PathFinder, display the sketch named Beads.

Step 2: Click the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Bead command .

Step 3: Click the Bead Options command .

Step 4: Set the following options:

• Cross section: U-Shaped.

• Height: 4.00 mm.

• Width: 3.50 mm.

• Angle: 20o.

• End Condition: Formed.

• Include rounding with a punch radius of 0.50 mm, and a die radius of 0.50 mm.

• Click OK.

Step 5: Select all the elements in the sketch as shown.

10-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Note
Clicking the arrow will reverse the direction of the beads.

Step 6: Right mouse click to accept the beads. The beads are created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-27


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Placing dimples and drawn cutouts


In this step you will place a dimple and a drawn cutout from a two different sketches.
Step 1: In PathFinder, display the sketch named Drawn.

Step 2: Click the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Drawn Cutout command .

Step 3: Click the Drawn Cutout Options command .

Step 4: Set the following options:


• Taper angle: 15o.

• Include rounding: die radius 1.75 mm.

• Include punch side corner radius: 1.75 mm..

• Click OK.

10-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 5: Select the region shown.

Step 6: Enter a distance of 15.00 mm.

Note
Clicking the arrow will reverse the direction of the drawn cutout.

Step 7: Right mouse click to accept the drawn cutout. The drawn cutout is created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-29


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Step 8: In PathFinder, display the sketch named Dimple.

Step 9: Click the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple command .

Step 10: Click the Dimple Options button .

Step 11: Observe the options, but do not change any of the options.

Step 12: Change the Profile Represents Punch or Die as shown

10-30 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 13: Select the regions shown.

Step 14: Enter a distance of 8.00 mm.

Note
Clicking the arrow will reverse the direction of the dimple.

Step 15: Right-click to accept the dimple. The dimple is created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-31


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

10-32 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Editing deformation features


In this step you will edit the bead feature created in an earlier step.
Step 1: In PathFinder, select the bead feature. Click the edit handle to edit the feature.

Step 2: Click the Edit Profile Handle.

Step 3: Select the line shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-33


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Step 4: Drag the endpoint of the line to a new position. Click the green check mark and then
right-click.

The deformation feature has been edited.

10-34 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Note
When editing a rigid procedural feature, the sketch used to create the feature
remains a part of the feature and can be modified at a later time.

Step 5: Save and close the sheet metal document.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-35


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Placing a single gusset


In this step you will place gussets between two thickness faces.
Step 1: Open gusset_activity.psm.

Step 2: Click the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Gusset command .

Step 3: Click the Gusset Options button .

Step 4: Set the following parameters:


• Depth: 11.25 mm.

• Include rounding with the both the Punch radius and Die radius being 1.50 mm.

• Gusset Shape: Round.

• Width: 9.00 mm.

• Click OK.

Step 5: Set the Gusset Patterning parameter to Single.

Step 6: Select the bend shown.

Step 7: Click the midpoint shown to place the gusset.

10-36 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 8: Right-click to complete the placement. The gusset is placed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-37


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Rotating faces containing gussets


In this step you will rotate a face containing a gusset and observe how the gusset responds.
Step 1: Click the Select tool and select he face shown.

Step 2: Move the steering wheel to the bend as shown and select the torus so as to rotate the
face.

Step 3: Enter an angle of 30o as shown.

10-38 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 4: The result is as shown.

Note
The gusset is an adaptive procedural feature that will change shape to as the
angle between the faces changes.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-39


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Placing a gusset pattern


In this step you will place multiple gussets along a bend.

Step 1: Click the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Gusset command .

Step 2: Click the Gusset Options button .

Step 3: Set the following parameters:


• Depth: 11.25 mm.

• Include rounding with the both the Punch radius and Die radius being 1.50 mm.

• Gusset Shape: Round.

• Width: 9.00 mm.

• Click OK.

Step 4: Set the gusset patterning parameter to fit.

Step 5: Select the bend shown.

Step 6: Set the count to 8. Observe the results.

10-40 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Step 7: Set the pattern type to fill. Observe the results.

Step 8: Set the pattern type to fixed. Set the count to 10 and the distance to 22.00 mm.

Step 9: Right-click to complete the gusset pattern. Observe the results.

Step 10: Save and close the sheet metal document. This concludes this activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-41


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Activity summary
In this activity you created a variety of deformation features. The feature origin for a rigid procedural
feature was displayed and moved to a new location. The feature was rotated. Multiple occurrences
where created with the pattern command.

10-42 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Activity: Adding deformation features across bends

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to add deformation features across a bend within a sheet metal
file. In this activity you will:
• Unbend a sheet metal part

• Create a bead across bends within the sheet metal file.

• Rebend the sheet metal part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-43


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open deformation_across_bend_activity.psm.

10-44 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Unbend the sheet metal part

Step 1: Select the Home→Sheet Metal→Bend→Unbend command .

Step 2: Place the cursor over the highlighted face and click.

Step 3: On the Unbend command bar, set the Select option to All Bends.

Step 4: On the Unbend command bar, click Finish.

Step 5: On the Unbend command bar, click Cancel.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-45


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Display the sketches to create the bead


Step 1: In PathFinder, click the entries for Sketch 1 and Sketch 2.

10-46 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Create a bead across the bends

Step 1: Select the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Bead command .

Step 2: On the Bead command bar, set the Create From option to Select From Sketch.

Step 3: Place the cursor over the highlighted sketch and click.

Step 4: On the Bead command bar click the Accept button.

Step 5: Position the cursor so the arrow appears as shown in the illustration.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-47


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Step 6: Click to accept the display side for the bead and then click Finish to create the bead.

10-48 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Create another bead


Step 1: Repeat the previous step to use Sketch 2 to create another bead.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-49


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Rebend the sheet metal part

Step 1: Select the Home→Sheet Metal→Bend→Rebend command .

Step 2: On the Rebend command bar, set the Select option to All Bends.

Step 3: On the Rebend command bar, click Finish.

10-50 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Hide the sketches


Step 1: In PathFinder, deselect the entries for Sketch 1 and Sketch 2.

Step 2: Save and close the sheet metal document. This concludes this activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-51


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Activity summary
In this activity you created deformation features across a set of bends. The sheet metal part was
flattened. The deformation features were created. The sheet metal part was rebent with the
deformation features across the bends.

10-52 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Deformation features

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What is the definition of a deformation feature?

2. What is the difference between a drawn cutout and a dimple?

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 10-53


Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Deformation
Deformation features
features

Lesson summary
In this lesson you created a variety of deformation features. The feature origin for a rigid procedural
feature was displayed and moved to a new location. The feature was rotated. Multiple occurrences
where created with the pattern command.

10-54 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Lesson 11: Modeling synchronous and ordered features

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-1


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Modeling synchronous and ordered features


In a Solid Edge modeling document, two environments coexist for creating model features. The two
environments are synchronous and ordered. You create synchronous features in the synchronous
modeling environment. You create ordered features in the ordered modeling environment. A model
can contain only synchronous features, only ordered features, or a combination of both feature types.
A synchronous feature is a collection of faces that define the feature shape. There is no history
retained of how a synchronous feature was created. You can edit the faces of a synchronous feature.
An ordered feature is history based. You can edit an ordered feature by returning to any step used in
the feature creation process. You do not edit faces of an ordered feature.

Opening a Solid Edge modeling document

• The Application menu→Settings→Options→Helpers page provides a setting for the modeling


environment to use when a new document opens. The default setting is Synchronous modeling.

• If an existing modeling document contains only synchronous elements, the document opens in
the synchronous environment.

• If an existing modeling document contains only ordered elements or a combination of ordered


and synchronous elements, the document opens in the ordered environment.

Moving between modeling environments

You can switch between environments at any time during the modeling process.
• Right-click in PathFinder or the graphics window to activate the shortcut menu, and then choose
either Transition to Synchronous or Transition to Ordered, depending on the environment that
is active.

• If a model contains both synchronous and ordered features, click the Ordered environment bar
or the Synchronous environment bar in PathFinder.

• On the ribbon, from the Tools tab→Model group, choose the modeling environment to transition
to.

Note
Each environment presents its own set of modeling commands.

11-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Feature display

In the ordered modeling environment, ordered and synchronous features appear.


In the synchronous modeling environment, ordered features appear transparent. In synchronous, the
display of ordered bodies can be turned on or off using the shortcut commands Show All→Ordered
Body or Hide All→Ordered Body.

Editing features

In ordered modeling, selecting an ordered feature displays the Edit Feature command bar for
ordered editing.
In ordered or synchronous modeling, selecting a synchronous body face displays the steering wheel
for synchronous editing.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-3


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Moving ordered features to synchronous


You can convert ordered features to synchronous features while in a part or sheet metal modeling
file. The conversion performs by moving ordered features into the synchronous portion of the
PathFinder tree. This move results in the feature geometry consuming into the synchronous body
and therefore available for synchronous editing.
The move to synchronous workflow occurs only when the file is in the ordered environment. Single
features or any number of features can convert with the Move to Synchronous command.
The ordered conversion is one way only. Synchronous features cannot convert to ordered features.

Note
You can also convert ordered features to synchronous features at a file level with the
Convert command. Multiple files can process simultaneously.

Feature conversion must start at the top of the ordered feature tree and be in a contiguous order. All
features in the tree above the selected feature include in the conversion. Mirror and pattern features
require both child and parent features for conversion to be successful. If any of the parents in the
select set have a child relationship to either a mirror or pattern feature, all features above these
children features are in the select set.
If a problem occurs in the conversion process, the Undo command is available.
A Move to Synchronous dialog displays to alert the users if additional dependencies are found, and
to provide any warning message that may affect the outcome of the move. This dialog only displays
when warnings exist and/or there are additional dependencies found.
Warning message: Feature dependency found. It is recommended that all dependencies be moved
with the selected feature.
You can click the Selection only button in the dialog to exclude the dependencies from the Move
operation.

Note
It is recommended to recompute the ordered node, and resolve any possible warnings or
failures before moving the ordered features to synchronous.

Moving local dimensions and sketches

When ordered local dimensions move to synchronous, Solid Edge attempts to locate and bind
dimensions to a vertex. If no vertex is found, then the dimensions become dangling dimensions.
Once moved, all ordered dimensions, except for dangling dimensions, display along with the
synchronous dimensions in the Dimensions node of the Synchronous portion of PathFinder. All
ordered dimensions that are driving or driven dimensions move as driven dimensions. When you do
a Move to Sync for a feature at a time,Solid Edge creates a user defined set each time there are
dangling dimensions.

11-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Note
Synchronous does not support dimensions between a part edge and a reference plane.
Therefore, dimensions placed between an ordered part edge and a reference plane move
to synchronous as dangling dimensions.

Local profile sketches in ordered convert as used sketches when they move to synchronous. The
profile sketch name in synchronous is the same as the ordered feature name.

What cannot be converted

• Ordered sheet metal with complex features such as louvers and dimples.

• Adjustable Part

• Family of parts

• Feature Library

• Published Multi-body Parts

What can be converted with restriction

• Component having Roll Back Features (Component can be converted however rollback features
will not convert).

• Component having suppressed features (Component can be converted however rollback


features will not convert).

Features/Bodies that cannot be converted

• Simplified Body

• Faceted Body

• Sheet metal features such as llouver and dimples.

Additional conversion information

• All part copy links are removed on conversion.

• All features are evaluated for Dependencies to a Mirror or pattern feature. Based on what is found
(dimple/Thread) you may get a warning or error indicating that said dependency cannot be moved.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-5


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Activity: Creating ordered features


This activity guides you through the process of creating ordered features. Learn how to switch
between modeling environments.

11-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Create a new part document


When creating a new part document, you can control the environment to begin modeling in.
The Application menu→Settings→Options→Helpers page provides a setting to start in the
Synchronous or Ordered environment. The default setting is the Synchronous environment.

Note
Existing files that contain only synchronous elements, open in the synchronous environment.
Existing files that contain only ordered elements or a combination of ordered and
synchronous elements, open in the ordered environment.

▸ Start Solid Edge ST9.

▸ Click the Application menu→Settings→Options→Helpers.

▸ On the Helpers page, under Start Part and Sheet Metal documents using this environment:,
click the Ordered button. Click OK.

▸ On the Application menu→New, click ISO Metric Part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-7


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Create an ordered base feature


▸ Create an extrusion with the cross-section shown. Extend symmetrically at a distance of 100 mm.

11-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Create an ordered cut feature


▸ Create a cut with the cross-section shown. Extend through all.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-9


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Transition to the Synchronous environment


There are three ways to transition to the other environment.
1. Right-click in PathFinder or modeling window and choose Transition to Synchronous (or
Transition to Ordered).

2. On the Tools tab→ Model group, click the environment to transition to.

3. If both environments exist, in PathFinder, click the environment bar to transition to.

Note
An environment bar is only available for selection if features exist in that environment.

▸ Transition to the Synchronous environment using a method of your choice.

Note
Notice that the ordered features do not appear. If no synchronous feature exists, ordered
features do not display. Once a synchronous feature exists, the ordered features display
with a transparent color. In the sysnchronous environment, ordered display can be turned on
or off with the shortcut menu commands Show All→Ordered Body or Hide All→Ordered
Body.

11-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Transition to the Ordered environment


▸ Click the Ordered environment bar to transition back to the Ordered environment.

▸ Save the file as ordered.par.

▸ Close the file.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-11


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Summary
In this activity you learned how to create ordered features. You also learned how to switch between
modeling environments.

11-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Activity: Creating both ordered and synchronous features in a model


This activity guides you through the process of creating both ordered and synchronous features
in the a model. Learn how to edit both feature types and how to convert an ordered feature to a
synchronous feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-13


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Create a new part document


▸ Create a new part document.

▸ Switch to the Synchronous environment. See the previous activity (Creating ordered features) if
you need help switching modeling environments.

11-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Create a synchronous base feature


▸ Create an extrusion with the cross-section shown. Extend symmetrically at a distance of 100 mm.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-15


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Create an ordered feature


▸ Transition to the ordered environment.

▸ Create an extrusion with the cross-section shown. Extend upward at a distance of 100 mm. Draw
the cross-section on the green face.

11-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Edit a synchronous feature face while in the ordered environment


Move the green face on the synchronous feature. The ordered feature is colored orange for clarity
only.

▸ Select the green face.

▸ Select the move handle and drag the face in an area around the ordered feature. Notice how the
ordered feature is recognized during an edit. Press Escape to end the move operation.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-17


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

▸ Select the green face.

▸ Select the move handle and drag the face to the right. Notice how the ordered feature moves
with face. This occurs because the ordered feature sketch was dimensionally locked to the
synchronous feature edge. Press Escape to end the move operation.

11-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Transition to synchronous
▸ Switch to the synchronous environment. Notice the ordered feature has a transparent display.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-19


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Edit the ordered feature


▸ Switch to the ordered environment.

▸ Select the ordered feature.

▸ Click the Dynamic Edit button. Change the 35 mm dimension to 70 mm.

11-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Convert the ordered feature to a synchronous feature


An ordered feature converts to a synchronous feature by moving the ordered feature to the
synchronous portion of the PathFinder. Once converted, all dimensions are dropped. The converted
feature can be manipulated as an entire synchronous feature or have individual face(s) manipulated.
▸ You must be in the ordered environment to convert ordered features. In PathFinder, right-click
on the ordered protrusion feature.

▸ On the shortcut menu, choose the Move to Synchronous command.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-21


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Move the converted feature


▸ In PathFinder, select the converted protrusion.

11-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

▸ Click the move handle and move feature to the approximate location shown and click. Press
Escape.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-23


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

This completes the activity.

11-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Summary
In this activity you learned how to create both ordered and synchronous features in a single model.
You also learned how to edit both feature types and how to convert an ordered feature to a
synchronous feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-25


Lesson
Lesson 11:11:Modeling
Modeling synchronous
synchronous and ordered
and ordered features
features

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What is an ordered feature?

2. What is a synchronous feature?

3. What are the differences in ordered and synchronous environments?

4. How do you convert ordered features to synchronous features?

5. How do you convert synchronous features to ordered features?

11-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Modeling synchronous and ordered features

Lesson summary
Solid Edge provides environments for modeling either synchronous or ordered features. You work in
a single model file with only synchronous features, only ordered features, or a combination of both
features types. You can convert ordered features to synchronous features.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 11-27


Lesson 12: Emboss features

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-1


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Emboss features
You can use the Emboss command to create an emboss feature (A) on a selected body (B) using
another selected body (C) as the embossing tool.

12-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

You can select multiple bodies when you define the embossing tool.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-3


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Constructing emboss features

When you construct an emboss feature, you can use the options on the Emboss command bar and
Emboss Options dialog box to determine the resulting emboss feature.

12-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

For example, you can use the Thickness option on the command bar to apply thickness to the tool
body prior to embossing the target.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-5


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

If you do not select this option, the clearance body is subtracted from the target.

12-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

You can use the Direction option on the command bar to flip the direction of the emboss feature.

Note
If there are multiple embossing tools, the flip direction is the same for all tools. If you want
a different tool direction for different tools, you must run the command multiple times and
select the tools individually.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-7


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

If the target body is a sheet metal model, you can use the Include die-side rounding option on the
Emboss Options dialog box to round the die side edges or the emboss feature.

12-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

You can use the Include punch and punch-side rounding option to round the punch side corners of
the emboss feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-9


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Adding emboss features in flatten mode

You can add an emboss feature to a sheet metal model only when the tool body is a construction
body. In the flattened mode, if an emboss feature is added across a bend the bend and bend
centerlines are maintained.

12-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

Emboss command

Use the Emboss command to create an emboss feature (A) on a selected body (B) using another
selected body (C) as the embossing tool.

Note
You can select multiple bodies when you define the embossing tool.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-11


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Emboss a body
1. Select the target body you want to emboss.

2. Do one of the following:


• If you are working in the part environment, choose Home tab→Solids group→Thin Wall
list→Emboss .

• If you are working in the sheet metal environment, choose Home tab→Sheet Metal
group→Dimple list→Emboss .

3. Click one or more tool bodies to create the emboss.

4. On the command bar, click the Options button if you want to set options for the emboss.

5. (Optional) Define the clearance.


If you specify a clearance value, the clearance body is offset from the tool body by the amount of
the clearance value.

12-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

6. (Optional) Select the Thicken option and then define the thickness and optionally use the
Direction option to change the tool direction.

7. Click the Accept button to create the embossed body.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-13


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Dynamically edit an emboss feature in the synchronous environment


1. Click the emboss feature you want to edit.

2. Click the steering wheel handle.

12-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

3. Drag the steering wheel to the desired location and click.

Note
You can type a value in the dynamic edit box to define the move distance.

4. Click anywhere in the graphics window to update the emboss feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-15


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Dynamically edit the clearance or thickness value in the ordered environment


1. Select an emboss feature in either PathFinder or the graphics window to display the Edit Feature
command bar.

2. Click the Dynamic Edit button to display the auto dimensions for the clearance and
thickness.

12-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

3. Click the dimension for the clearance or thickness to display the dynamic edit box.

4. Type a new dimension and press Enter.

5. Click anywhere in the graphics window to complete the edit.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-17


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Edit an emboss feature in the ordered environment


1. Select an emboss feature in either PathFinder or the graphics window to display the Edit Feature
command bar.

2. Click the Edit Definition button.

12-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

3. Use the command bar options to edit the emboss definition. For example, click the Direction

button to change the direction of the emboss.

4. Click the Accept button to update the emboss feature .

5. Click anywhere in the graphics window to complete the edit to the emboss feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-19


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Edit the thickness value of an emboss feature in the synchronous environment


1. Select an emboss feature in either PathFinder or the graphics window to display the edit handle
that shows the thickness value.

2. Click the thickness value to display the dynamic edit box.

12-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

3. Type in a new thickness and use the options on the dynamic edit box to apply the new thickness
to all similar faces in the embossed feature, only the selected faces, or all similar faces in the
model.

4. Press Enter.

5. Click anywhere in the graphics window to update the emboss feature.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-21


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Activity: Create an emboss feature

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to design bodies to create an emboss feature in a solid model. In
this activity you will:
• Select a target body for the emboss feature.

• Select a tool body for the emboss feature.

• Create the emboss feature.

12-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

Open the activity file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open emboss_activity_01.par.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-23


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Start the Emboss command

Step 1: Select the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple→Emboss command .

Step 2: Click the Emboss options button on the command bar.

Step 3: Ensure the options on the Emboss Options dialog box match the illustration.

12-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

Select the target body


Step 1: Move the cursor over the highlighted body and click to define the target body to be
embossed.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-25


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Select the tool body


Step 1: Move the cursor over the highlighted body and click to define the tool body.

Step 2: On the Emboss command bar click the Accept button, and then press the Esc key.

12-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

Observe the results


Step 1: Rotate the model so that you can see the bottom of the model.
Notice that the solid part model that you started with is now an embossed body.

Step 2: Save and close the sheet metal document. This concludes this activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-27


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Activity summary
In this activity you used design bodies to create a emboss feature in a solid model. The target body
defined the body to emboss. The tool body defined the design for the emboss.

12-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Emboss features

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What is an emboss feature?

2. In which two environments can you use the Emboss command?

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 12-29


Lesson
Lesson 12:12:Emboss
Emboss features
features

Lesson summary
In this activity you used design bodies to create a emboss feature in a solid model. The target body
defined the body to emboss. The tool body defined the design for the emboss.

12-30 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Lesson 13: Creating flat patterns

Manipulating sheet metal geometry

After constructing a sheet metal part, you may need to create a flat pattern of the part for
manufacturing.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-1


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Flattening sheet metal parts


After constructing a sheet metal part, you can use the Flat Pattern and Save As Flat commands
to create a flat pattern of a sheet metal part.

Using the Flatten command

Use the Tools tab →Flat group→Flat Pattern command in the Sheet Metal environment to create a
flat pattern in the same file as the formed sheet metal part.
When you flatten a sheet metal part with the Flat Pattern command, a flat pattern feature is added
to the PathFinder tab.
If the sheet metal model changes, the flat pattern becomes outdated. This is indicated by a symbol
adjacent to the flat pattern feature in PathFinder. To update the flat pattern, select the flat pattern
feature in PathFinder, then on the shortcut menu click Update.

Using the Save As Flat command

The Save As Flat command flattens a sheet metal part and saves the part as one of the following
document types:
Part document (.par)
Sheet Metal document (.psm)
AutoCAD document (.dxf)

Note
When you use the Save As Flat command, the flattened document is not associative to
the folded document.

You can create the flat pattern definition based on:


• An existing flat pattern

• The folded model state

Select the Use Existing Flat Pattern (Use Folded Model if Not Defined) option on the Flat Pattern
Treatments page of the Solid Edge Options dialog box to create the flat pattern based on an existing
flat pattern. Any material you add or remove in the flat pattern environment is included when the flat is
saved. If no flat pattern exists, the folded model is used to define the pattern.
Select the Use Folded Model option on the Flat Pattern Treatments page of the Solid Edge Options
dialog box to create the flat pattern definition based on the folded model state, even if a flat pattern
already exists. Any material you add or remove in the flat pattern environment is excluded when
the flat is saved.

13-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Minimum bend radius


To facilitate creation of flat patterns, Solid Edge always creates a minimum bend radius for flanges,
contour flanges, and lofted flanges, even if you specify a bend radius value of zero (0.00). For metric
documents, a zero bend radius is set to a value of approximately 0.002 millimeters. For English
documents, a zero bend radius is set to a value of approximately 0.0000788 inches. If you need the
bend radius to be exactly zero, you have to create the features in the Part environment.

Cleaning up flat patterns


When flattening sheet metal parts, the system adds bend relief to the flat pattern. This
system-generated bend relief can cause problems to downstream manufacturing processes such as
punching and nesting. While working in the Sheet Metal environment, you can set options on the Flat
Pattern Treatments page of the Options dialog box to automatically clean up the flat pattern.
The options on the Flat Pattern Treatments tab control corner treatments, simplify B-splines in the
model to arcs and lines, and remove the system-generated bend relief.
If you change the options on this tab after a flat pattern is generated it recomputes the flat pattern,
or updates the flat pattern.

Managing flat pattern size


Use the Flat Pattern Options dialog box to set the maximum flat pattern size and issue a warning if
that size is violated. This is useful if a part cannot be manufactured because of sheet size limitations.

The Current size section of the dialog box displays the length and width of the current flat pattern.
These values are read-only and cannot be changed manually. They are updated when the values
change in the flat model and the model is updated. The Alarm section allows you to specify the
maximum length and width values for the flat pattern. You can specify a maximum length, maximum
width, or both. You can either key in these values or use default values that are specified on the Flat
Pattern Treatments page on the Options dialog box. If the flat pattern violates these size limitations,
an alarm icon is displayed adjacent to the flat pattern entry in PathFinder. If you pause the cursor
over the flat pattern entry, a tool tip displays the current flat pattern size along with the maximum
size limitations.

You can use the Show Cut Size Range and Dimensions option to display a range box for the flat
pattern along with the dimensions for the current length and width of the flat pattern. The size of
the pattern is determined when the flat pattern is created and is recalculated when the flat model
is updated.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-3


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Flattening deformation features

If you want to remove a deformation feature after you flatten a part using the Flat Pattern and
Part Copy commands, you can construct a cutout feature that is sized according to the area
the deformation feature occupied. In many cases, you can use the Include command to create
a cutout profile that is associatively linked to the edges of the deformation feature. Later, if the
deformation feature changes, the cutouts also update. This approach maintains the true position for
the deformation feature, which can be useful for creating downstream manufacturing documentation.
Alternatively, you can use the commands on the command bar to remove the deformation features
prior to or after you flatten the part. For example, you can use the Delete Faces command to delete a
deformation feature. The deformation feature is not physically deleted from the part, it is still available
when working in the Sheet Metal environment. With this approach, the location of the deformation
feature is lost in the flattened version of the part.

Displaying deformation features in the flat pattern

You can use the options in the Formed Feature Display section of the Flat Pattern Treatments page
to specify how deformation features are displayed in the flat pattern.
You can display the deformation features as a formed feature,

as a feature loop,

13-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

as a feature origin,

or as a feature loop and feature origin.

Saving deformation features to other files


The Formed Feature Display section of the Flat Pattern Treatments page specifies how deformation
features are exported when you use the Save as Flat to flatten the sheet metal model and save it
to another document.
When saving the document to .prn or .psm format:
• As Formed Feature replaces the deformed feature with a cutout the size of the area consumed
by the feature.

• As Feature Loops replaces the loops representing the deformation feature with a curve.

• As Feature Origin does not export the deformation feature or the feature origin.

• As Feature Loops and Feature Origin replaces the loops representing the deformation feature
with a curve and feature origins are not exported.

When saving the document to .dxf format:


• As Formed Feature replaces the deformed feature with a 2D wireframe representation as
they would appear in the formed condition.

• As Feature Loops replaces the loops representing the deformation feature with a curve and
are specified as either an up or down feature.

• As Feature Origin does not export the deformation feature or the feature origin.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-5


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

• As Feature Loops and Feature Origin replaces the loops representing the deformation feature
with a curve and are specified as either an up or down feature. Feature origins are not exported.

Flattening lofted flanges

Only lofted flanges that consist of planes, partial cylinders, and partial cones can be flattened. Lofted
flanges that contain ruled surfaces cannot be flattened. The type of geometry constructed depends
upon how you draw the profiles.
A lofted flange is constructed by mapping the faces between corresponding profile elements. For
example, profile lines A1 and B1 are mapped to construct planar faces. Profile arcs A2 and B2 are
mapped to construct conical faces.

If the two profiles have the same number and type of elements, and each element on the first profile
maps to the same element type on the second profile (line to line, or arc to arc), in most cases,
you can flatten it.

13-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Ruled surface examples

Any lofted flange that contains a ruled surface cannot be flattened. The following examples describe
when a ruled surface is constructed:

• A face constructed where line A1 has a different angle relative to line B1.

• A face constructed where arc A2 has a different start angle or included angle relative to arc B2.

• A face constructed using an arc and a line.

Note
If the lofted flange contains faces that would prevent it from being flattened, a gray arrow is
displayed adjacent to the feature on the PathFinder tab. If you pause your cursor over the
feature in PathFinder, a message is displayed in the status bar describing the problem.

PMI dimensions in the flat pattern

When a flat pattern is created, PMI dimensions are placed as driven dimensions. In other words,
these dimensions are for reference only and cannot be changed while in the flat pattern. If you select
a PMI dimension in the flat pattern, all fields on the dimension edit control are disabled. If you make
changes to the model, the PMI dimensions are updated when the flat pattern updates.

Adding material to the flat pattern

You can use the Tab command to add material to a flat pattern.

Any tabs created in the flat pattern are placed in the flat pattern node of PathFinder. Any material
added to the flat pattern appears only in the flat pattern state. The folded model will not reflect
the material addition.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-7


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Saving sheet metal files as AutoCAD documents (.dxf)

When you save a sheet metal part as an AutoCAD document (.dxf), it is saved as 2D. Collinear and
concentric arcs are merged into single elements. Bend lines are added as wireframe bodies.
Layers are used to separate the various types of information such as bends, deformation features,
and edges. A layer scheme defines the information that is stored on the different layers.
• Default or Normal edges are saved to layers named Outer_Loop and Interior_Loops. All edges
from flanges, contour flanges, lofted flanges, tabs, cutouts, and sheet metal cutouts are placed
on these layers. The layers can contain visible and hidden edges.

• Bend down centerlines are saved to a layer named DownCenterlines. This layer contains the
bend centerlines of all linear and conical bends that are in the down direction relative to the
selected output face. These lines are generated in the flatten process and do not exist in the
model. The line style associated with bend down centerlines can be saved to this layer.

• Bend up centerlines are saved to a layer named UpCenterlines. This layer contains the bend
centerlines of all linear and conical bends that are in the up direction relative to the selected
output face. These lines are generated in the flatten process and do not exist in the model. The
line style associated with bend up centerlines can be saved to this layer.

• Deformation features found on down bends are output to a layer named DownFeatures. This
layer contains the edges of all deformation features that are in the down direction relative to the
selected output face. This layer can contain visible and hidden edges.

• Deformation features found on the up bends are output to a layer named UpFeatures. This layer
contains the edges of all deformation features that are in the up direction relative to the selected
output face. This layer can contain visible and hidden edges.

13-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Creating flat pattern drawings


You can create drawings of flattened sheet metal parts in the Draft environment. A special template
can be applied when a flat pattern drawing is created. This template has tangent edges displayed so
that the lines that represent the edges of the bends (A) are shown in the drawing.

To apply the template, you must run the Drawing View Wizard and set the Part and Sheet Metal
Drawing View Options on the first page of the Drawing View Creation Wizard to Flat Pattern.
You also can display tangent edges in a drawing that was created with a different template. Use the
Edge Display tab on the Solid Edge Options dialog box.
The flat pattern created with the Flatten command contains all bend centerline information used to
create bend centerlines in drawing views.
In draft, you also can add the centerline to a bend (A) using the By Two Lines option with the Center
Line command.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-9


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Specifying bend options

In part, sheet metal, and draft, you can use the options on the Annotation page (Solid Edge Options
dialog box) to:
• Customize bend direction strings for Up, Down, and Undefined bends.

• Create and assign independent styles to bend up centerlines and to bend down centerlines.

• Specify which part face is the top face in the flat pattern drawing view. By default, bend direction
is derived from the face that is designated the top face when a sheet metal part is flattened. In
draft, you can keep the model bend direction properly aligned with the flattened drawing view
using the Derive Bend Direction from Drawing View option.

Updating flat pattern drawings

When you make design changes to a folded sheet metal part, you need to update the associatively
flattened part first, and then update the flattened drawing to see the changes. When you open the
flattened part document, an out of date symbol is displayed adjacent to the base feature in the
PathFinder tab. To update the flattened part, select the Flat Pattern entry in PathFinder, then use
the Update command on the shortcut menu.
When you open the drawing of the flattened part, a box is displayed around each drawing view to
indicate that they are out of date. To update the drawing views, use the Update Views command.

Placing bend tables on drawings

Once you create a drawing of a flattened sheet metal part in the Draft environment, an associated
Bend Table can be added to the drawing sheet. Use the Bend Table command in the Draft
environment. To learn how to do this, see Save bend data with flat patterns.

13-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-11


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

13-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Construct a flat pattern in the sheet metal part document


1. Select Tools tab→Model → Flatten.

2. Select Tools tab→Flat group→Flat Pattern .

3. Click a face to be oriented upward in the flat.

4. Click an edge to define the X axis and origin.

Note
The definition of the X axis is aligned or orientated with the Global X-axis of the sheet
metal file.

5. Click to complete the flat pattern.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-13


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Tip
• After flattening, you can use this command multiple times to adjust the orientation by
selecting a new edge for alignment.

• When you create a flat pattern, a Flat Pattern tab is added to PathFinder. You can delete
the flat pattern by deleting the Flat Pattern entry in the Flat Pattern tab of PathFinder.

• If the Sheet Metal model changes, the flat pattern will go out-of-date. This is indicated
with a clock symbol overlapping the Flat Pattern tab in PathFinder. To update the flat
pattern, click the Flat Pattern tab in PathFinder.

• You can add PMI dimensions to the flat pattern.

• The flat pattern created with the Flat Pattern command contains all bend centerline
information used to create bend centerlines in Draft drawing views. It also contains the
same information used by the Save As Flat command.

• You can use the Flat Pattern Options dialog box to set a maximum flat pattern size. If
the flat pattern violates the maximum size a warning icon is displayed adjacent to the
flat pattern entry in PathFinder. This can help you determine whether or not the part can
be manufactured due to sheet size limitations.

• You can use the Simplify B-Splines option on the Flat Pattern Treatments tab on the
Options dialog box to specify that any b-spline curves in the part are simplified to lines
and arcs when creating the flat pattern. B-spline curves can be created when creating
cutouts across bends and when using stencil font characters.

13-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Flat Pattern command


Flattens a sheet metal part in the same document as the design model. The flattened version of the
part is associative to the formed version of the part.

You can use the Flat Pattern Treatments tab on the Options dialog box to control output parameters
for the flat pattern. For example, you can specify that any B-spline curves in the formed part are
simplified to lines and arcs when creating the flat pattern. B-spline curves can be created when
creating cutouts across bends and when using stencil font characters.

Note
When you use this command to construct the flat pattern, Solid Edge places a Flat Pattern
entry in PathFinder.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-15


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Save As Flat command


Flattens the sheet metal part and saves it to a document type you define. You can specify that
the part is saved as a .par, .psm, or .dxf file.
You can create the flat pattern definition based on:
• An existing flat pattern

• The folded model state

You can use the options on the Flat Pattern Treatments page of the Solid Edge Options dialog
box to specify how to define the flat pattern. You can also use options to specify how deformation
features are displayed in the flat pattern.
Use Save As Flat when a flat pattern of a Solid Edge sheet metal file is needed in .dxf format. The
resulting 3D planar geometry is merged wherever possible to provide a more efficient tool path for
CNC programming. A drawing can be produced from the geometry generated by this process.
However, it will neither be associative nor linked to the 3D sheet metal file from which it derives.

Note
Bend lines are not automatically created with this command. If you want to automatically
create bend lines, you must use the Insert Part Copy command to create a flat .psm file.
You can then place a part view for the flat .psm file in a draft file.

13-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Activity: Creating a flat pattern from a sheet metal part


Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to create a flat pattern from a sheet metal part, and the various
options available. In this activity you will:
• Create a flat pattern from a sheet metal part.

• Control the orientation of the flat pattern.

• Understand the options available for using the flat pattern with downstream manufacturing
applications.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-17


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Open a sheet metal file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open flatpattern_activity.psm.

13-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Creating a flat pattern


Step 1: Click Tools→Model→Flatten.

The Flat Pattern command bar displays.

Step 2: Select the face shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-19


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Step 3: Select the edge shown to orient the flat pattern.

13-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Note
The edge selected defines the x axis of the flat pattern.

The flat pattern is created.

Note
Notice there is a new tab in PathFinder for the flat pattern.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-21


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Flat pattern options


Step 1: Click the Flat Pattern Cut Size button.

Step 2: Observe the following on this dialog box.


• The cut size of the flat pattern dimensions can be displayed.

• Alarms can be set to notify if the cut size is larger than a desired size.

• The current cut size is displayed if this command is chosen in the flattened state
rather than the design state.

Step 3: Close the dialog box.

Step 4: Click the Flat Pattern Treatment Options button.

Note
The flat pattern treatment options can also be set by clicking the application
button and then clicking Solid Edge Options.

Step 5: Set Outside Corner Treatments to Chamfer and set the value to 4.00 mm. Click
Apply. Observe the results. Chamfers are applied to the exterior corners that do not
contain rounds.

Note
This corner treatment only shows up in the flattened state and not in the
designed state.

13-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Step 6: Set Formed Feature Display to As Feature Loops and Feature Origin and click
Apply. Observe the results.

Note
When placing a flat pattern onto a drawing sheet in Solid Edge Draft, this
display controls the what geometry is placed. If the sketches or 3D geometry is
desired on the drawing sheet, the option will need to be set here.

Step 7: Set Formed Feature Display to As Feature Origin and click Apply. Observe the results.

Step 8: Save the file.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-23


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Saving the flat pattern as a .dxf or .par file


Step 1: Click the Application menu.

Step 2: Click Save as→Save as Flat.

Step 3: Save the file as my_flat.dxf.

Note
Some numerical control machines can read a .dxf file directly. The flat pattern
can also be saved as a Solid Edge part file.

13-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Placing a flat pattern on a drawing sheet


Step 1: Click the Application button.

Step 2: Click New→Drawing of Active Model.

Step 3: Use the default template and ensure the Run Drawing View Creation Wizard button is
checked, and click OK.

Step 4: In the Drawing View Creation Wizard, click the Flat Pattern option in Drawing view
options. Click OK.

Step 5: Click the Drawing View Layout button and on the Drawing View Layout dialog box,
select the top view and then click OK.

Step 6: Click to place the flat pattern on the drawing sheet and click the right mouse button
to finish the command.

Note
The feature origins, or strike points, for the deformation features are displayed.
These can precisely located by dimensioning.

Note
The display of tangent edges on the drawing view represent the location of the
edges of bends.

Step 7: Close the sheet metal documents without saving.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-25


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Activity summary
In this activity you created a flat pattern and changed the display options. You also placed the flat
pattern on a drawing sheet.

13-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating flat patterns

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. Describe the steps needed to create a flat pattern.

2. When saving a flat pattern using the save as flat command, what file types are available?

3. What is a feature origin on a flat pattern?

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 13-27


Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Creating
Creating flat patterns
flat patterns

Lesson summary
In this lesson you created a flat pattern and changed the display options. You also placed the flat
pattern on a drawing sheet.

13-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Lesson 14: Converting sheet metal files

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-1


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Converting part documents to sheet metal


In some cases, it may be easier to convert an existing part model to a sheet metal part than to
create it in the sheet metal environment. You can use the following commands to covert a part
model to a sheet metal part:
• Part to Sheet Metal

• Thin Part to Sheet Metal

• Thin Part to Synchronous Sheet Metal

It is important that you understand how these commands work before deciding which command you
should use to convert the part model to sheet metal.
You can use the Part to Sheet Metal command to convert an ordered part model to an ordered sheet
metal part. You can select linear edges or partial cylindrical faces on the model to define the bends
for the resulting sheet metal part. The tabs for the sheet metal part are defined by the bend edges.

14-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

You can use the Thin Part to Sheet Metal command to transform a uniform thickness solid body to a
sheet metal model. In ordered, the command uses a reference face on the input body to identify and
marks tabs and bends. In synchronous, it creates native tabs and flanges. The input face defines
the thickness for the sheet metal model. You can add sheet metal features to the body as well
as edit the thickness or bend radius.
You can use the Thin Part to Synchronous Sheet Metal command to transform a uniform thickness
ordered or synchronous part consisting into a synchronous sheet metal part that consists of native
tabs and flanges. The transformed body contains sheet metal attributes just as if you used sheet
metal features to create it. You can add sheet metal features to the body as well as edit the thickness
or bend radius.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-3


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Adding features in the Part environment

You can access a sheet metal document (.PSM) in the Part environment to add features to it. On the
Tools tab, use the Switch to command to access the Part environment. After you have finished, you
can use can use the same command to return to the Sheet Metal environment..
You can add any type of part feature to a sheet metal part, but some features can prevent the Part
Copy command from flattening the part. If you intend to flatten a part later, you should create a test
part and see if the part features you want to add can be flattened.

14-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Part to Sheet Metal command

Use the Part to Sheet Metal command to convert an ordered part model to an ordered sheet
metal body that you can flatten.
You can define the sheet metal bends by selecting linear edges.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-5


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

You can also define the sheet metal bends by selecting a partially cylindrical face on the part model.

The tabs for the sheet metal document are defined by the bend edges.

Defining bend and corner parameters

When you convert a part model to sheet metal, you can use the Part to Sheet Metal Options dialog
box to define parameters for all bend and corners created in the sheet metal part. Once converted,
you can select bends and corners and override the value that you defined when you created the
sheet metal part.

14-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Ripping edges

When you convert a part to sheet metal, faces are automatically ripped and rip edges are defined
from the bend edges. You can also press R while converting the part to define rips along selected
lines and vertex pairs.

Consuming input body

When you convert a part to sheet metal, you can use the Keep Body option on the Part to Sheet
Metal Options dialog box to either retain or consume the input body during the conversion.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-7


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Thin Part to Sheet Metal command

Use the Thin Part to Sheet Metal command to transform a uniform thickness solid model to
a sheet metal model.

In ordered, the command uses a reference face on the input body to identify and marks tabs and
bends. In synchronous, it creates native tabs and flanges. The input face defines the thickness
for the sheet metal model.
Once transformed, you can add sheet metal features to the body, such as jogs, dimples, and so
forth. You can also edit the thickness, bend radius, or flatten the model, just as you can with any
native sheet metal file.
You can use the command to rip edges in models that contain fused corners. If you try to transform a
part that contains fused corners, upon transformation of the face selection, you must split an edge
or curve. To complete the part transformation, click the Rip Step button on the command bar, and
then click the edges or curves to split.

If needed, the command uses the bend radius specified on the Options dialog box to round the
model edges. In some cases, such as a partial flange or interior flange that contains round corners
and sharp corners, the command adds bend relief to the model so the model can be successfully
converted to a sheet metal part.
If there are no sheet metal features in the file, the material thickness is computed from the selected
solid model based on the material thickness setting on the Options dialog box. When the feature
updates, the material thickness value updates based on the changes to the solid. If more than one
transformed feature exists, the first feature in the tree structure sets the value.
As with the Save As Flat command, all features are transformed except planes, partial cylinders,
and ruled surfaces. All other geometry is stored as deformation features. Unlike the Save as Flat
command, features such as interior loops and spline faces are not removed from the model. The
faces appear in the model as deformation feature faces.

14-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Thin Part to Synchronous Sheet Metal command

Use the Thin Part to Synchronous Sheet Metal command to transform an ordered or
synchronous part consisting of a uniform thickness (1) into a synchronous sheet metal model
consisting of native tabs (2) and flanges (3).

The transformed body contains sheet metal model attributes as if it were created using sheet metal
features. Once transformed, you can add sheet metal features to the body, such as jogs, dimples,
and so forth. You can also edit the thickness, bend radius or flatten the model, just as you can with
any native sheet metal file.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-9


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

You can use the command to rip edges in models that contain fused corners. If you try to transform a
part that contains fused corners, upon transformation of the face selection, you must split an edge
or curve. To complete the part transformation, click the Rip Step button on the command bar, and
then click the edges or curves to split.

14-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Activity: Convert a part to sheet metal

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to a part model to sheet metal and then add features to the sheet
metal model. In this activity you will:
• Select linear edges to define bends for the sheet metal part.

• Add a dimple to the new sheet metal feature.

Watch the video

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-11


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Open the activity file


Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open convert_part_activity_01.par.

14-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Start the Part to Sheet Metal command

Step 1: Select the Tools→Transform→Part to Sheet Metal command .

Step 2: If the Part to Sheet Metal Options dialog box is displayed, click Cancel.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-13


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Select the linear edges


Step 1: Select the eight highlighted linear edges to create bends for the new sheet metal part.

Step 2: As you select the edges, the edges that must be ripped and the coplanar edges are
automatically ripped.

14-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Change the bend radius


Step 1: Click the bend icon.

Step 2: Type 1.00 for the new Bend Radius.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-15


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Chage the corner treatment


1. Click the corner treatment sphere.

2. Select the Open corner treatment.

3. Right-click to accept the change.

4. Right-click to convert the part.

14-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-17


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Create a dimple
Step 1: In PathFinder, display the sketch named Dimple.

Step 2: Click the Home→Sheet Metal→Dimple command .

Step 3: On the Dimple command bar, set the Create From option to Select from Sketch.

Step 4: Select the sketch shown and click Accept.

Step 5: Enter a distance of 5.00 mm and position the mouse above the model as shown

14-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Step 6: Click Finish. The dimple is created.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-19


Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Converting
Converting
sheetsheet
metalmetal
files files

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What three commands can you use to convert a part to sheet metal?

2. What input is required for the Part to Sheet Metal command?

14-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Converting sheet metal files

Lesson summary
In this lesson you converted an ordered part model into a sheet metal model. You modified the bend
radius where needed and then used the cutout command and the break corner command to finish
the model. Once converted you added sheet metal features to the model just as if it was originally
created in sheet metal.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 14-21


Lesson 15: Creating blanks

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 15-1


Lesson
Lesson 15:15:Creating
Creating blanks
blanks

Creating blank features


Blank features are an essential part in the production of things such as deep drawn parts and
stamped parts. These blank features are an approximate representation of the part model in a
flattened state, indicating an approximate amount of material needed to create the end part.
Some advantages of creating blanks include:
• Accuracy and dimensional control that can be repeated through a production run.

• Excellent part flatness in the blank.

• More economical when producing large number of parts.

15-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating blanks

You can use the Blank Body command to create a flattened body of an ordered or synchronous part
or sheet metal model in the flatten environment.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 15-3


Lesson
Lesson 15:15:Creating
Creating blanks
blanks

You can use the Blank Surface command to create flat surface of an ordered or synchronous part
or sheet metal model.

For input, both commands require a set of connected faces, a draw direction, a thickness, and
formability properties. Blank features also require a material definition to determine the material
deformation for the blank. If the document does not already have a material assigned, you are
required to assign it when creating the blank.

Note
The thickness is inferred for sheet metal parts.

The Blank body command orients the resulting blank in XY plane with the longest side of the blank
along X axis while, with the Blank Surface command the blank is placed in a plane normal to the
draw direction.

15-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating blanks

Blank Body command

Use the Blank Body command to create a flattened body from selected model faces of an
ordered or synchronous part or sheet metal model.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 15-5


Lesson
Lesson 15:15:Creating
Creating blanks
blanks

Blank Surface command

Use the Blank Surface command to create a flattened surface from selected model faces in an
ordered or synchronous part or sheet metal model.

Activity: Create a blank body

Activity: Create a blank body

Activity objectives

This activity demonstrates how to a create a flattened body of a part model. In this activity you will:
• Specify a material for the model.

• Select a tangent face chain on the model.

• Specify a draw direction for the blank

• Create a blank which provides an approximate representation of the part model in a flattened
state.

15-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating blanks

Watch the video

Open the activity file

Step 1: Start Solid Edge ST9.

Step 2: Open create_blank_activity_01.par.

Start the Create Blank command

Step 1: Select Tools→Model→Flatten.

Note
Because you are selecting a part body, the Create Blank command is
automatically selected when you click Flatten.

Specify a material for the model

Step 1: In PathFinder, double-click the Material entry to display the Material Table dialog box.

Step 2: In the Material Table dialog box, set the Material to Copper.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 15-7


Lesson
Lesson 15:15:Creating
Creating blanks
blanks

Note
If a material is already applied to the model, the Solid Edge Material Table
dialog box is not displayed.

Step 3: Click Apply To Model.

Select the tangent face chain

Step 1: Select the eight highlighted tangent face chain.

Specify a draw direction for the blank

Step 1: Click the highlighted handle to define the draw direction for the blank.

15-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating blanks

Step 2: On the Blank command bar, click Preview.

Step 3: Click OK on the information dialog box.

Step 4: Click Finish.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 15-9


Lesson
Lesson 15:15:Creating
Creating blanks
blanks

Lesson review
Answer the following questions:
1. What are advantages of creating blanks?

2. What command can you use to create a flattened body?

3. What command can you use to create a flattened surface?

15-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Creating blanks

Lesson summary
In this lesson you created a flattened body of a part model in the flattened environment. The
blank feature is an approximate representation of the part model in a flattened state, indicating an
approximate amount of material needed to create the end part.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 15-11


Lesson 16: Ordered sheet metal activities

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-1


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Activity: Editing an ordered flange feature


Overview

In this activity, you will create a flange and then edit the default flange profile to accommodate the
shape of a contour flange.

Objectives

After completing this activity, you will be able to edit a flange.

16-2 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Open activity file


▸ Open flange_edit.psm. Use Save As to create a duplicate file called flange_edit2.psm. Initially,
you will work in this new file. Later you will open the original file.

Note
When you Save As and define a new name, this new file will be active.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-3


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Create a contour flange


Create a contour flange using the sketch provided.

▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, choose the Contour Flange command .

▸ On the command bar in the Sketch Step, click the Select from Sketch option.

▸ Select Sketch 1.

▸ Click the Accept button.

▸ Position the direction arrow pointing inside the sketch. Click to accept the inside of the sketch
for material addition.

▸ Click the Symmetric Extent button .

▸ In the Distance box, type 250, and press the Enter key.

▸ Click Finish.

16-4 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Hide all sketches.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-5


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Create a flange

▸ Click the Flange command .

▸ On the command bar, click the Flange Options button.

▸ Set the Corner relief option to Bend only and click OK.

▸ For the thickness face edge, select the outside edge on the right end of the model.

16-6 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Set the Material Inside option.

▸ For the extent step, in the Distance box type 150 and press the Enter key.

▸ Click to place the flange toward the front of the model.

▸ At this point, you could go to the edit flange profile step or Finish the flange. We will Finish the
flange and then go back and edit the flange profile. Click Finish.

▸ Save the file.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-7


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Edit the flange


Edit the flange profile to accommodate the shape of the contour flange.

▸ Click the Select tool .

▸ Select the flange.

▸ There are two ways to enter the profile mode to edit the flange profile. You can click the Edit
Definition button and then on the command bar, click the Flange profile step.

▸ You can also click the Edit Profile button to go directly to the profile.

16-8 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Click the Edit Profile button.

▸ On the Home tab→Draw group, click the Project to Sketch command . You will use this
command to draw a profile that precisely matches the shape of existing contour flange edges.

▸ On the Include Project to Sketch dialog box, set the "Project with offset" option and click OK.

▸ Set the Select filter to Tangent Wireframe.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-9


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Select the interior edge of the model as shown and click the Accept button.

▸ The Tangent Wireframe option will create extra lines that you will delete later.

▸ On the command bar, in the Distance box, type 2 and press the Enter key.

▸ Position the cursor so that the arrow points inside. Click to place the profile elements inside of
the model.

▸ On the Home tab→Select group, click the Select tool .

▸ Delete the bottom horizontal line of the original flange profile.

▸ Zoom in to the top left corner.

16-10 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Delete lines A and B created with the Include command. Use QuickPick for selecting the
horizontal line (A). You will get two choices to select: 1) the include/offset relationships and 2)
the horizontal line. Make sure you select the horizontal line.

▸ Click the Trim Corner command .

▸ Trim and join both ends of the included profile with the two original vertical lines. This will
complete the profile as shown in the illustration below.

▸ Click Close Sketch to complete the profile.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-11


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click Finish again to complete the flange feature.

16-12 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Mirror the flange


Mirror the last flange you created to the other side of the sheet metal part.
▸ Turn on the display of the base reference planes.

▸ On the Home tab→Pattern group, click the Mirror Copy Feature command.

▸ On the Mirror Copy feature command bar, click the Smart button.

▸ On Pathfinder, select the flange feature.

▸ On the command bar, click the Accept button.

▸ Select the reference plane shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-13


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click Finish.

▸ Save and close the file.

16-14 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

An alternate method of creation for the contour flange


Use an alternate method of creation for the contour flange.
▸ Open the file flange_edit.psm.

▸ Edit sketch named “Sketch 1”. Delete line A.

▸ Edit the 88° dimension to 60°.

▸ Click Close Sketch and Finish.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-15


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Create a contour flange using the modified sketch


▸ Create a contour flange with a symmetric extent of 250 mm. Add material inside the profile.

16-16 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Use the Match Face option in the Flange command

▸ Click the Flange command .

▸ Select the edge shown.

▸ Type 20 mm in the Distance field and set the direction as shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-17


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ In the Offset Step (1), click the Match Face button (2) and type 40 mm in the Offset field.

▸ Select the inside back face as the “match face”.

▸ Set the direction arrow towards the flange.

16-18 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Click Finish. The flange has been matched to the back face.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-19


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Repeat the previous steps to complete the enclosure

16-20 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Activity summary
In this activity, you learned how to construct a flange, then modify the profile using existing edges to
correctly create the desired geometry of the new flange.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-21


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Activity: Using the ordered lofted flange command


Overview

In this activity you will use the Lofted Flange command to construct a base feature.

Objectives

After completing this activity, you will be able to construct a lofted flange.

16-22 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Open the activity file


▸ Open loft.psm.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-23


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Construct a lofted flange


▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, click the Lofted Flange command.

▸ On the command bar, ensure that the Select from Sketch/Part Edges option is set.

▸ For the first cross section, position the mouse cursor over the left end of Sketch 1.

▸ Click when a red dot displays on the profile.

▸ Click the Accept button to accept the profile and start point.

▸ Select the left end of Sketch 2 as the next cross section.

16-24 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Click the Accept button.

▸ Position the cursor outside of the profile.

▸ When the arrow points outside of the profile, indicating material addition will occur on that side of
the profile, click.

▸ Click Finish to complete feature. Notice that sketches are hidden in the illustrations for the
purpose of clarity.

▸ Save the file.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-25


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Edit the loft profiles


In the first phase of this activity, the Lofted Flange command inserted bends using the default bend
radius defined in the options for this file. Edit the profiles to include fillets that will define the bend
size and shape. Notice in the illustration (A) that the profiles have been edited to provide conical
shaped bends.

▸ Click the Select Tool.

▸ Position the mouse cursor over Sketch 1.

▸ Right-click to display the shortcut menu.

▸ On the shortcut menu, click Edit Profile.

▸ Use the Fillet command to add 5 mm fillets at the two vertices.

▸ Add a radial dimension to one of the fillets.

▸ Add an equal relationship to both.

16-26 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Note
Notice that both the lofted flange solid and Sketch 2 are hidden for clarity in the previous
illustration.

▸ Click Close Sketch.

▸ Click Finish to complete the sketch.

▸ If sketches are not listed in Pathfinder, right-click in the Pathfinder window, and on the shortcut
menu, click PathFinder Display→Sketches.

▸ While still in the Select tool command, right-click Sketch 2 in Pathfinder.

▸ On the shortcut menu, click Edit Profile.

▸ Use the Fillet command to place 15 mm fillets on the two vertices.

▸ Add a radial dimension to one of the fillets.

▸ Add an equal relationship to both fillets as shown.

▸ Notice that the lofted flange solid is hidden for clarity.

▸ Click Close Sketch.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-27


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click Finish to complete the sketch.

▸ Notice that with different-sized fillets on the vertices of the two profiles, the resulting bends
are now conical.

16-28 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Divide the bends


Divide the bends. This produces marks on the metal indicating incremental bend lines within a
bend and add index notches. Typical uses of this capability are for modeling and manufacturing
transitions such as square to round.
▸ Right-click the lofted flange feature and click Edit Definition.

▸ On the command bar, click the Lofted Flange options button.

▸ On the Lofted Flange Options form, click the Bending method tab. Check the “Use triangulation
to develop each bend” option. Set 10 as the number of resultant bends and type 10 mm for
the Index mark length. Click OK.

▸ The divide lines appear on the bends. Click Finish.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-29


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Save the file.

▸ This completes the activity.

16-30 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Activity summary
In this activity, you learned how to use sketches to identify geometry to be included in defining the ends
of a lofted sheet metal flange. When the sketches were modified the geometry adjusted accordingly.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-31


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Activity: Constructing ordered sheet metal features


Overview

In this activity, you will construct the sheet metal features covered in this lesson. To help you work
more quickly, you will work with a file that already has sketches drawn for each feature.

After completing this activity, you will be able to create all of the features shown. Each sketch is
listed in PathFinder.

16-32 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Open activity file


▸ Open deformation_features.psm.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-33


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Create a jog feature


Create a jog feature using one of the sketches provided. Adjust a pair of mounting holes (A) to
be planar with the pair of mounting holes (B).

▸ In Pathfinder, click on the toggle box for the sketch named jog_sketch.

Note
You can hide and show features on Pathfinder by selecting the corresponding toggle box.

▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, on the Bend drop list, choose the Jog command.

▸ On the command bar, click the Select from Sketch option.

16-34 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ Select the sketch and click the Accept button.

▸ Click on the side of the profile shown.

▸ To define the distance, select the keypoint shown (top vertex). This will ensure that the top face
of the mounting holes being jogged are planar to the top face of these mounting holes.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-35


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ The result shown is with the default setting of “material inside the profile”. Also notice that both
mounting holes were included in the jog feature. This is because a Bend option was set to
Extend profile. The profile was extended across the entire face.

▸ On the command bar, click the Options button. Uncheck the Extend profile option and then
click OK.

16-36 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ With the Extend profile option turned off, the jog only includes the region of the profile.

▸ Turn on the Extend profile option. On the command bar, click the “Material Outside” option.

▸ On the command bar, click the “Bend Outside” option. Notice that this option only jogs the region
defined by the profile. The profile cannot be extended in this particular case.

▸ Set the “Material Inside” option and click Finish.

▸ Hide the sketch named jog_sketch.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-37


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Create gusset features


Create gussets using both automatic and user-defined methods.
▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, on the Dimple drop list, choose the Gusset command.

▸ Select the Gusset Options button.

16-38 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ In this particular case, the Automatic profile option is set. Solid Edge will create the profile
according to the Depth value. Click OK to accept the default depth value for now. Select the
bend shown.

▸ Select a location for the gusset. In this case you will drag it along the bend. However you can
enter a distance value.

▸ Click Finish.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-39


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Create a circular-shaped gusset


Create a circular-shaped gusset with a User-drawn profile.
▸ On the command bar, select the Gusset Options button and change the Gusset Profile to
User-drawn profile. You can save this set of parameters by naming it in the Saved settings field
as shown. Enter a Width of 10 mm, then click OK.

Note that the command bar changes for the User-drawn profile type.

Gusset definition steps

1. Plane selection for drawing the profile

2. Profile step

3. Gusset direction step

4. Gusset side step (user must select this step)

16-40 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

▸ In the Profile Step, you will construct an arc which will represent the final cross-sectional shape of
the gusset. First you will be prompted for a sketch plane creation method. Use Parallel Plane
option and select the face shown.

▸ You can drag the plane along the bend, enter a value in the distance field or use a keypoint.
Select the midpoint of the bend as shown.

▸ You are now in the profile step. Sketch the arc shown and then click Close Sketch.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-41


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ You are now in the direction step. Select the direction shown towards the bend.

▸ The side step defaults to a symmetric extent about the profile plane. If you want to control the
side direction, you must click the side step. Otherwise, the side step is skipped and the gusset
definition is complete. We will take the default. Click Finish.

Shown are two different perspectives of the result.

16-42 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Change gusset options


Change gusset options for the gusset just created and observe the results.
▸ Click the Select tool and then click the gusset feature.

▸ Click Edit Definition.

▸ Click the Gusset options button. Set the options shown.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-43


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click OK and view the changes to the gusset.

Note
Looking at the underside of the gusset, you can clearly see the difference between
the square versus round shape.

▸ Click Finish.

▸ As gussets are placed, you will see them in the Pathfinder as features.

16-44 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Create a dimple feature


Create a dimple feature using a closed profile.
▸ In Pathfinder, show the sketch named dimple_sketch.

▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, choose the Dimple command .

▸ Click the Select from Sketch option.

▸ Select the sketch shown and click the Accept button.

▸ On the command bar, type 3 in the Distance field and then press the Enter key. Position the
cursor above the profile and click to define the direction.

▸ Click the Options button. On the Dimple Options form, type 30 in the Taper angle field and
then click OK.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-45


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click Finish and then hide the sketch named dimple_sketch.

16-46 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Create a drawn cutout feature


Create a drawn cutout feature using a closed profile.

▸ Show the sketch named drawn_cutout_sketch.

▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, on the Dimple drop list, choose the Drawn Cutout
command.

▸ Click the Select from Sketch option.

▸ Select the sketch shown, and click the Accept button.

▸ Type 3 in the Distance field and press the Enter key. Position the cursor below the profile and
click to define the direction.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-47


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click the Options button. On the Drawn Cutout Options form, type 30 in the Taper angle field and
uncheck the Include rounding option. Click OK.

▸ Click Finish and hide the sketch named drawn_cutout_sketch.

16-48 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Create a louver feature


▸ Show the sketch named louver_sketch.

▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, on the Dimple drop list, choose the Louver command.

▸ Click the Select from Sketch option.

▸ Select the sketch shown and click the Accept button.

▸ Type 5 in distance field and press the Enter key. This defines the depth of the louver. Position
cursor as shown and click to define the direction.

▸ Type 3 in distance field and press the Enter key. This defines the height of the louver. Position
cursor as shown and click to define the direction.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-49


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click the Options button and make sure the options are set as shown. Click OK.

▸ Click Finish.

▸ Hide the sketch named louver_sketch.

16-50 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Create a pattern of the louver feature


▸ Show the sketch named pattern_sketch.

▸ On the Home tab→Pattern group, choose the Pattern command .

▸ Select the louver feature and then click the Accept button.

▸ Select the plane shown.

▸ Use the two points shown to define the pattern profile.

▸ On the command bar, set the pattern options as shown and then click Close Sketch.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-51


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ Click Finish and hide the sketch named pattern_sketch.

16-52 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Create a bead feature


▸ Show the sketch named bead_sketch.

▸ On the Home tab→Sheet Metal group, on the Dimple drop list, choose the Bead command.

▸ Click the Select from Sketch option.

▸ Select the sketch edge shown and click the Accept button.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-53


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

▸ For the side step, position the cursor so that the arrow points as shown, and click.

▸ Click the Options button. Set the options as shown and click OK.

▸ Click the Finish button. The bead is complete.

16-54 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Ordered sheet metal activities

Save and close the file


Save and close the file. This completes the activity.

mt01419-s-1050 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide 16-55


Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Ordered
Ordered
sheetsheet
metalmetal activities
activities

Activity summary
In this activity you used sketch geometry to exercise a variety of sheet metal feature commands. You
learned the ease of placing jog, dimple, drawn cutout, louver, bead and gusset feature. There are
numerous options available with each of these commands. Be sure to experiment with these options
to better understand how these commands can be used to produce the required result.

16-56 Solid Edge sheet metal design student guide mt01419-s-1050


Siemens Industry Software

Headquarters
Europe
Granite Park One
Stephenson House
5800 Granite Parkway
Sir William Siemens Square
Suite 600
Frimley, Camberley
Plano, TX 75024
Surrey, GU16 8QD
USA
+44 (0) 1276 413200
+1 972 987 3000

Asia-Pacific
Americas
Suites 4301-4302, 43/F
Granite Park One
AIA Kowloon Tower, Landmark East
5800 Granite Parkway
100 How Ming Street
Suite 600
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
Plano, TX 75024
Hong Kong
USA
+852 2230 3308
+1 314 264 8499

About Siemens PLM Software

© 2016 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management


Siemens PLM Software, a business unit of the Siemens
Software Inc. Siemens and the Siemens logo are
Industry Automation Division, is a leading global provider
registered trademarks of Siemens AG. D-Cubed,
of product lifecycle management (PLM) software and
Femap, Geolus, GO PLM, I-deas, Insight, JT, NX,
services with 7 million licensed seats and 71,000 customers
Parasolid, Solid Edge, Teamcenter, Tecnomatix and
worldwide. Headquartered in Plano, Texas, Siemens
Velocity Series are trademarks or registered trademarks
PLM Software works collaboratively with companies
of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software
to deliver open solutions that help them turn more
Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in other
ideas into successful products. For more information
countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks
on Siemens PLM Software products and services, visit
or service marks belong to their respective holders.
www.siemens.com/plm.

You might also like